| all | frequencies |
|
|
exhibits | applications |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| manuals | |||||
| app s | submitted / available | |||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 |
|
User's manual-1 | Users Manual | 4.05 MiB | ||||
| 1 |
|
User's manual-2 | Users Manual | 3.45 MiB | ||||
| 1 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
| 1 | Test Setup Photos | |||||||
| 1 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
| 1 | External Photos | |||||||
| 1 | Internal Photos | |||||||
| 1 | ID Label/Location Info | |||||||
| 1 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
| 1 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
| 1 | Test Setup Photos | |||||||
| 1 | Test Report |
| 1 | User's manual-1 | Users Manual | 4.05 MiB |
NVG2053 Wireless N Gigabit VoIP Gateway Default Login Details IP Address Password http://192.168.1.1 1234 Firmware Version 1.0 Edition 1, 02/2011 www.zyxel.com www.zyxel.com Copyright 2011 ZyXEL Communications Corporation About This User's Guide About This User's Guide Intended Audience This manual is intended for people who want to configure the NVG2053 using the Web Configurator. Related Documentation Quick Start Guide The Quick Start Guide is designed to help you get up and running right away. It contains information on setting up your network and configuring for Internet access. Support Disc Refer to the included CD for support documents. Documentation Feedback Send your comments, questions or suggestions to: techwriters@zyxel.com.tw Thank you!
The Technical Writing Team, ZyXEL Communications Corp., 6 Innovation Road II, Science-Based Industrial Park, Hsinchu, 30099, Taiwan. Need More Help?
More help is available at www.zyxel.com. Download Library Search for the latest product updates and documentation from this link. Read the Tech Doc Overview to find out how to efficiently use the documentation in order to better understand how to use your product. NVG2053 Users Guide 3 About This User's Guide Knowledge Base If you have a specific question about your product, the answer may be here. This is a collection of answers to previously asked questions about ZyXEL products. Forum This contains discussions on ZyXEL products. Learn from others who use ZyXEL products and share your experiences as well. Customer Support Should problems arise that cannot be solved by the methods listed above, you should contact your vendor. If you cannot contact your vendor, then contact a ZyXEL office for the region in which you bought the device. See http://www.zyxel.com/web/contact_us.php for contact information. Please have the following information ready when you contact an office. Product model and serial number. Warranty Information. Date that you received your device. Brief description of the problem and the steps you took to solve it. 4 NVG2053 Users Guide Document Conventions Document Conventions Warnings and Notes These are how warnings and notes are shown in this Users Guide. Warnings tell you about things that could harm you or your device. Note: Notes tell you other important information (for example, other things you may need to configure or helpful tips) or recommendations. Syntax Conventions The NVG2053 may be referred to as the NVG2053, the device, the product or the system in this Users Guide. Product labels, screen names, field labels and field choices are all in bold font. A key stroke is denoted by square brackets and uppercase text, for example,
[ENTER] means the enter or return key on your keyboard. Enter means for you to type one or more characters and then press the
[ENTER] key. Select or choose means for you to use one of the predefined choices. A right angle bracket ( > ) within a screen name denotes a mouse click. For example, Maintenance > Log > Log Setting means you first click Maintenance in the navigation panel, then the Log sub menu and finally the Log Setting tab to get to that screen. Units of measurement may denote the metric value or the scientific value. For example, k for kilo may denote 1000 or 1024, M for mega may denote 1000000 or 1048576 and so on. e.g., is a shorthand for for instance, and i.e., means that is or in other words. Icons Used in Figures Figures in this Users Guide use the following generic icons. The NVG2053 icon is not an exact representation of your NVG2053. Graphics in this book may differ slightly from the product due to differences in operating systems, operating system versions, or if you installed updated NVG2053 Users Guide 5 Document Conventions firmware/software for your device. Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this manual is accurate. NVG2053 Computer Notebook computer Server Modem Firewall Telephone Switch Router 6 NVG2053 Users Guide Safety Warnings Safety Warnings Do NOT use this product near water, for example, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool. Do NOT expose your device to dampness, dust or corrosive liquids. Do NOT store things on the device. Do NOT install, use, or service this device during a thunderstorm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device. Do NOT open the device or unit. Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks. ONLY qualified service personnel should service or disassemble this device. Please contact your vendor for further information. Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports. Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them. Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling. Use ONLY an appropriate power adaptor or cord for your device. Connect the power adaptor or cord to the right supply voltage (for example, 110V AC in North America or 230V AC in Europe). Do NOT allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the product where anyone can walk on the power adaptor or cord. Do NOT use the device if the power adaptor or cord is damaged as it might cause electrocution. If the power adaptor or cord is damaged, remove it from the power outlet. Do NOT attempt to repair the power adaptor or cord. Contact your local vendor to order a new one. Do not use the device outside, and make sure all the connections are indoors. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do NOT obstruct the device ventilation slots, as insufficient airflow may harm your device. Antenna Warning! This device meets ETSI and FCC certification requirements when using the included antenna(s). Only use the included antenna(s). If you wall mount your device, make sure that no electrical lines, gas or water pipes will be damaged. This CPE product is for indoor use only (utilisation intrieure exclusivement). Your product is marked with this symbol, which is known as the WEEE mark. WEEE stands for Waste Electronics and Electrical Equipment. It means that used electrical and electronic products should not be mixed with general waste. Used electrical and electronic equipment should be treated separately. NVG2053 Users Guide 7 Safety Warnings 8 NVG2053 Users Guide Contents Overview Contents Overview Users Guide ...........................................................................................................................19 Getting to Know Your NVG2053 ................................................................................................ 21 Tutorials ..................................................................................................................................... 27 Connection Wizard .................................................................................................................... 49 Introducing the Web Configurator .............................................................................................. 59 Technical Reference ..............................................................................................................67 Status Screens .......................................................................................................................... 69 Monitor ....................................................................................................................................... 75 Broadband ................................................................................................................................. 81 Wireless LAN ............................................................................................................................. 93 LAN .......................................................................................................................................... 121 DHCP Server ........................................................................................................................... 125 Quality of Service (QoS) .......................................................................................................... 131 Network Address Translation (NAT) ........................................................................................ 139 Dynamic DNS .......................................................................................................................... 145 Static Route ............................................................................................................................. 147 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) ............................................................................................. 151 Firewall .................................................................................................................................... 161 Voice ........................................................................................................................................ 167 USB Service ............................................................................................................................ 197 Management ............................................................................................................................ 201 Maintenance ............................................................................................................................ 207 Password ................................................................................................................................. 209 Time ..........................................................................................................................................211 Firmware Upgrade ................................................................................................................... 215 Backup/Restore ....................................................................................................................... 217 Language ................................................................................................................................. 221 Restart ..................................................................................................................................... 223 Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................................... 225 Product Specifications ............................................................................................................. 231 NVG2053 Users Guide 9 Contents Overview 10 NVG2053 Users Guide Table of Contents Table of Contents About This User's Guide ..........................................................................................................3 Document Conventions............................................................................................................5 Safety Warnings........................................................................................................................7 Contents Overview ...................................................................................................................9 Table of Contents....................................................................................................................11 Part I: Users Guide................................................................................ 19 Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your NVG2053 ............................................................................................21 1.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 21 1.2 Applications ......................................................................................................................... 21 1.2.1 The WPS Button ........................................................................................................ 23 1.3 Ways to Manage the NVG2053 ........................................................................................... 23 1.4 Good Habits for Managing the NVG2053 ............................................................................ 23 1.5 LEDs .................................................................................................................................... 24 1.6 Resetting the NVG2053 ....................................................................................................... 25 1.6.1 Procedure to Use the Reset Button ........................................................................... 25 Chapter 2 Tutorials...................................................................................................................................27 2.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 27 2.2 Getting Starting with the NVG2053 ...................................................................................... 27 2.3 How to Make a VoIP Call ..................................................................................................... 28 2.3.1 VoIP Calls With a Registered SIP Account ................................................................ 28 2.4 How to Set up a Secure Wireless Network .......................................................................... 31 2.4.1 Configuring the Wireless Network Settings ................................................................ 32 2.4.2 Using WPS ................................................................................................................. 34 2.4.3 Without WPS .............................................................................................................. 38 2.5 How to Access the NVG2053 Using DDNS ......................................................................... 39 2.5.1 Registering a DDNS Account on www.dyndns.org .................................................... 39 2.5.2 Configuring DDNS on Your NVG2053 ........................................................................ 40 2.5.3 Testing the DDNS Setting .......................................................................................... 40 2.6 How to Route Traffic to Another Network Using Static Route .............................................. 41 NVG2053 Users Guide 11 Table of Contents 2.7 How to Set Up NAT Port Forwarding ................................................................................... 43 2.8 How to Use QoS to Prioritize LAN Traffic ............................................................................ 45 Chapter 3 Connection Wizard .................................................................................................................49 3.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 49 3.2 Accessing the Wizard .......................................................................................................... 49 3.3 Connect to Internet .............................................................................................................. 50 3.3.1 Connection Type: PPPoE ........................................................................................... 51 3.3.2 Connection Type: DHCP ............................................................................................ 53 3.3.3 Connection Type: Static IP ......................................................................................... 53 3.4 Router Password ................................................................................................................. 55 3.5 Wireless Security ................................................................................................................. 55 3.5.1 Wireless Security: No Security ................................................................................... 56 3.5.2 Wireless Security: WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK .................................................................. 57 Chapter 4 Introducing the Web Configurator ........................................................................................59 4.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 59 4.2 Accessing the Web Configurator ......................................................................................... 59 4.2.1 Login Screen .............................................................................................................. 60 4.2.2 Password Screen ....................................................................................................... 62 4.3 The Web Configurator Layout .............................................................................................. 63 4.3.1 Navigation Panel ........................................................................................................ 63 4.3.2 Main Window .............................................................................................................. 66 4.3.3 Status Bar ................................................................................................................... 66 Part II: Technical Reference .................................................................. 67 Chapter 5 Status Screens ........................................................................................................................69 5.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 69 5.2 Status Screen ...................................................................................................................... 70 Chapter 6 Monitor.....................................................................................................................................75 6.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 75 6.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter .............................................................................. 75 6.2 The View Log Screen .......................................................................................................... 75 6.3 The Log Settings Screen .................................................................................................... 76 6.4 The DHCP Table Scren .................................................................................................... 77 12 NVG2053 Users Guide Table of Contents 6.5 The Packet Statistics Screen ............................................................................................ 77 6.6 The WLAN Station Status Screen .................................................................................... 79 Chapter 7 Broadband...............................................................................................................................81 7.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 81 7.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter .............................................................................. 81 7.2 What You Need To Know ..................................................................................................... 81 7.3 The Broadband Screen ...................................................................................................... 83 7.3.1 Broadband Configuration ........................................................................................... 84 7.3.2 PPPoE Encapsulation ................................................................................................ 86 7.4 Technical Reference ............................................................................................................ 90 Chapter 8 Wireless LAN...........................................................................................................................93 8.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 93 8.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter .............................................................................. 94 8.2 What You Need to Know ...................................................................................................... 94 8.3 General Wireless LAN Screen ............................................................................................ 97 8.3.1 No Security ................................................................................................................. 98 8.3.2 WEP Encryption ......................................................................................................... 99 8.3.3 WPA(2)-PSK ............................................................................................................ 101 8.3.4 WPA(2) Authentication ............................................................................................. 102 8.4 MAC Filter .......................................................................................................................... 104 8.5 Wireless LAN Advanced Screen ....................................................................................... 105 8.6 Quality of Service (QoS) Screen ....................................................................................... 107 8.7 WPS Screen ...................................................................................................................... 107 8.8 WPS Station Screen .......................................................................................................... 109 8.9 Scheduling Screen .............................................................................................................110 8.10 Technical Reference .........................................................................................................111 8.10.1 Additional Wireless Terms .......................................................................................111 8.10.2 Wireless Security Overview ....................................................................................111 8.10.3 WiFi Protected Setup ..............................................................................................114 Chapter 9 LAN.........................................................................................................................................121 9.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 121 9.2 What You Can Do in this Chapter ...................................................................................... 121 9.3 What You Need To Know ................................................................................................... 122 9.3.1 Multicast ................................................................................................................... 122 9.4 LAN IP Screen ................................................................................................................... 123 9.5 LAN Advanced Screen ...................................................................................................... 124 NVG2053 Users Guide 13 Table of Contents Chapter 10 DHCP Server..........................................................................................................................125 10.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 125 10.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter .......................................................................... 125 10.2 What You Need to Know .................................................................................................. 125 10.2.1 DHCP ..................................................................................................................... 125 10.2.2 IP Pool Setup ......................................................................................................... 125 10.3 General Screen ............................................................................................................... 126 10.4 Advanced Screen ......................................................................................................... 126 10.5 Client List Screen ............................................................................................................ 128 Chapter 11 Quality of Service (QoS).......................................................................................................131 11.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 131 11.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................... 131 11.2 The Quality of Service General Screen .......................................................................... 132 11.2.1 QoS Class Edit ...................................................................................................... 134 11.3 Technical Reference ........................................................................................................ 135 Chapter 12 Network Address Translation (NAT)....................................................................................139 12.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................... 139 12.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter .......................................................................... 140 12.2 The General NAT Screen ................................................................................................ 140 12.3 The NAT Port Forwarding Screen .................................................................................. 140 12.3.1 Port Forwarding Edit Screen ................................................................................. 142 Chapter 13 Dynamic DNS ........................................................................................................................145 13.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 145 13.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter .......................................................................... 145 13.2 What You Need To Know ................................................................................................. 145 13.3 The Dynamic DNS Screen ............................................................................................ 146 Chapter 14 Static Route ...........................................................................................................................147 14.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................... 147 14.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter .......................................................................... 147 14.2 The IP Static Route Screen ............................................................................................ 148 14.2.1 Static Route Edit ................................................................................................... 149 Chapter 15 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)..........................................................................................151 14 NVG2053 Users Guide Table of Contents 15.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 151 15.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter .......................................................................... 151 15.2 What You Need to Know .................................................................................................. 151 15.3 The UPnP Screen ............................................................................................................ 152 15.4 Installing UPnP in Windows ............................................................................................. 153 15.4.1 Windows 7 .............................................................................................................. 153 15.4.2 Windows XP ........................................................................................................... 154 15.5 Using UPnP in Windows XP ............................................................................................ 155 15.5.1 Auto-discover Your UPnP-enabled Network Device .............................................. 156 15.5.2 Web Configurator Easy Access ............................................................................. 158 Chapter 16 Firewall...................................................................................................................................161 16.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................ 161 16.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter .......................................................................... 161 16.2 What You Need To Know ................................................................................................. 161 16.3 The General Firewall Screen ........................................................................................ 162 16.4 The Services Screen .................................................................................................... 163 16.4.1 Configuring Firewall Rules ................................................................................... 164 Chapter 17 Voice.......................................................................................................................................167 17.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 167 17.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter .......................................................................... 167 17.1.2 What You Need to Know ........................................................................................ 168 17.2 Before You Begin ............................................................................................................. 168 17.3 The SIP Service Provider Screen ................................................................................... 169 17.4 The SIP Account Screen ................................................................................................ 172 17.4.1 SIP Account Edit .................................................................................................. 173 17.4.2 Dial Plan Rules ....................................................................................................... 176 17.5 The Phone Device Screen .............................................................................................. 177 17.5.1 The Phone Device Edit Screen ............................................................................. 178 17.6 The Phone Region Screen ............................................................................................. 180 17.7 The Speed Dial Screen .................................................................................................... 180 17.7.1 The Speed Dial Edit Screen .................................................................................. 182 17.8 The PSTN call through Screen ....................................................................................... 182 17.9 Technical Reference ........................................................................................................ 183 17.9.1 Quality of Service (QoS) ........................................................................................ 191 17.9.2 Phone Services Overview ...................................................................................... 192 Chapter 18 USB Service...........................................................................................................................197 18.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 197 NVG2053 Users Guide 15 Table of Contents 18.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter .......................................................................... 197 18.2 What You Need to Know .................................................................................................. 197 18.3 Before You Begin ............................................................................................................. 198 18.4 The 3G Connection Setup Screen ................................................................................... 198 Chapter 19 Management..........................................................................................................................201 19.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 201 19.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter .......................................................................... 201 19.2 What You Need To Know ................................................................................................. 201 19.3 The TR-069 Screen ......................................................................................................... 202 19.4 The WWW Screen ........................................................................................................... 204 19.5 The Telnet Screen ........................................................................................................... 204 19.6 The ICMP Screen ............................................................................................................ 205 Chapter 20 Maintenance ..........................................................................................................................207 20.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 207 20.2 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................ 207 20.3 General Screen .............................................................................................................. 207 Chapter 21 Password...............................................................................................................................209 21.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 209 21.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter .......................................................................... 209 21.2 Password Screen ............................................................................................................ 209 Chapter 22 Time........................................................................................................................................ 211 22.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................211 22.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ...........................................................................211 22.2 Time Setting Screen ........................................................................................................ 212 Chapter 23 Firmware Upgrade ................................................................................................................215 23.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 215 23.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter .......................................................................... 215 23.2 Firmware Upgrade Screen .............................................................................................. 215 Chapter 24 Backup/Restore.....................................................................................................................217 24.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 217 24.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter .......................................................................... 217 16 NVG2053 Users Guide Table of Contents 24.2 Backup/Restore Screen ................................................................................................... 218 Chapter 25 Language...............................................................................................................................221 25.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 221 25.2 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................ 221 25.3 The Language Screen ..................................................................................................... 221 Chapter 26 Restart....................................................................................................................................223 26.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 223 26.2 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................ 223 26.3 The Restart Screen ......................................................................................................... 223 Chapter 27 Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................225 27.1 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs ...................................................................... 225 27.2 NVG2053 Access and Login ........................................................................................... 226 27.3 Internet Access ................................................................................................................ 228 27.4 Resetting the NVG2053 to Its Factory Defaults ............................................................... 229 27.5 Wireless Router/AP Troubleshooting ............................................................................... 230 Chapter 28 Product Specifications .........................................................................................................231 Appendix A Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions ......................................235 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address...........................................................247 Appendix C Wireless LANs ..................................................................................................275 Appendix D Legal Information ..............................................................................................291 Appendix E Open Software Announcements .......................................................................295 Index.......................................................................................................................................323 NVG2053 Users Guide 17 Table of Contents 18 NVG2053 Users Guide PART I Users Guide 19 20 1 CHAPTER Getting to Know Your NVG2053 1.1 Overview This chapter introduces the main features and applications of the NVG2053. The NVG2053 extends the range of your existing wired network without additional wiring, providing easy network access to mobile users. You can set up a wireless network with other IEEE 802.11b/g/n compatible devices. The NVG2053 supports Voice over IP (VoIP) technology to allow you to use an analog telephone to make phone calls over the Internet. The NVG2053 also supports 3G, which allows you to insert a 3G wireless adapter in the USB port and use the 3G WAN connection as your WAN or a backup to enhance network reliability. You can enable NAT and use Quality of Service (QoS) to efficiently manage traffic on your network by giving priority to certain types of traffic and/or to particular computers. 1.2 Applications Your can create the following networks using the NVG2053:
LAN. You can connect network devices via the Ethernet ports of the NVG2053 so that they can communicate with each other and access the Internet. Wireless. Wireless clients can connect to the NVG2053 to access network resources. NVG2053 Users Guide 21 Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your NVG2053 WAN. Connect to a broadband modem/router for Internet access. Figure 1 NVG2053 Networks WLAN LAN WAN 3G WAN. The USB port allows you to wirelessly connect to a 3G netowk to get Internet access by attaching a 3G wireless adapter. You must leave the Ethernet WAN port unconnected and attached a 3G wireless card to use 3G as your WAN. You can also have the NVG2053 use the 3G WAN connection as a backup. That means the NVG2053 switches to the 3G wireless WAN connection after the wired Ethernet WAN connection fails. The NVG2053 automatically changes back to use the wired Ethernet WAN connection when it is available. Figure 2 Internet Access Application: 3G WAN VoIP Internet Calls. You can register up to two SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) accounts and use the NVG2053 to make and receive VoIP telephone calls. The NVG2053 sends your call to a VoIP service providers SIP server (A) which forwards your calls to either VoIP or PSTN phones. Figure 3 VoIP Application A 22 NVG2053 Users Guide Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your NVG2053 1.2.1 The WPS Button You can use the WPS button (
WPS in order to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security.
) on the top panel of the NVG2053 to activate 1 Make sure the POWER LED is on (not blinking). 2 Press the WPS button for more than three seconds and release it. Press the WPS button on another WPS-enabled device within range of the NVG2053. Note: You must activate WPS in the NVG2053 and in another wireless device within two minutes of each other. See Section 8.10.3 on page 114 for more information. 1.3 Ways to Manage the NVG2053 Use any of the following methods to manage the NVG2053. Web Configurator. This is recommended for everyday management of the NVG2053 using a (supported) web browser. Wireless switch. You can use the built-in switch of the NVG2053 to turn the wireless function on and off without opening the Web Configurator. WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) button. You can use the WPS button or the WPS section of the Web Configurator to set up a wireless network with your ZyXEL Device. TR-069. This is an auto-configuration server used to remotely configure your device. 1.4 Good Habits for Managing the NVG2053 Do the following things regularly to make the NVG2053 more secure and to manage the NVG2053 more effectively. Change the password. Use a password thats not easy to guess and that consists of different types of characters, such as numbers and letters. Write down the password and put it in a safe place. Back up the configuration (and make sure you know how to restore it). Restoring an earlier working configuration may be useful if the device becomes unstable or even crashes. If you forget your password, you will have to reset the NVG2053 to its factory default settings. If you backed up an earlier configuration file, you would not have to totally re-configure the NVG2053. You could simply restore your last configuration. NVG2053 Users Guide 23 Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your NVG2053 1.5 LEDs Figure 4 Top Panel The following table describes the LEDs and the WLAN button. Table 1 Top Panel LEDs and WPS Button LED POWER COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION Green On ETHERNET 1-4 Green WLAN Green WAN Green INTERNET Green PHONE 1/2 Green Off On Blinking Off On Blinking Off On Blinking Off On Off On Blinking Off 24 The NVG2053 is receiving power and functioning properly. The NVG2053 is not receiving power. The NVG2053 has a successful 10/100/1000MB Ethernet connection. The NVG2053 is sending/receiving data through the LAN. The LAN is not connected. The NVG2053 is ready, but is not sending/
receiving data through the wireless LAN. The NVG2053 is sending/receiving data through the wireless LAN. The wireless LAN is not ready or has failed. The NVG2053 has a successful 10/100/1000MB WAN connection. The NVG2053 is sending/receiving data through the WAN. The WAN connection is not ready, or has failed. The NVG2053 has an IP connection. Your device has a WAN IP address (either static or assigned by a DHCP server), PPP negotiation was successfully completed (if used) and the DSL connection is up. The NVG2053 does not have an IP connection. A SIP account is registered for the phone port. A telephone connected to the phone port has its receiver off of the hook or there is an incoming call. The phone port does not have a SIP account registered. NVG2053 Users Guide Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your NVG2053 Table 1 Top Panel LEDs and WPS Button LED USB COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION Green On Blinking Off The NVG2053 recognizes a USB connection. The NVG2053 is sending/receiving data to /from the USB device connected to it. The NVG2053 does not detect a USB connection. 1.6 Resetting the NVG2053 If you forget your password or IP address, or you cannot access the Web Configurator, you will need to use the RESET button at the side of the NVG2053 to reload the factory-default configuration file. This means that you will lose all configurations that you had previously saved, the password will be reset to 1234 and the IP address will be reset to 192.168.1.1. 1.6.1 Procedure to Use the Reset Button 1 Make sure the power LED is on. 2 Press the RESET button for longer than ten seconds to set the NVG2053 back to its factory-default configurations. NVG2053 Users Guide 25 Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your NVG2053 26 NVG2053 Users Guide CHAPTER 2 Tutorials 2.1 Overview This chapter describes:
How to Make a VoIP Call (see page 28). How to Set up a Secure Wireless Network (see page 31). How to Access the NVG2053 Using DDNS (see page 39) How to Route Traffic to Another Network Using Static Route (see page 41) How to Set Up NAT Port Forwarding (see page 43) How to Use QoS to Prioritize LAN Traffic (see page 45) Note: The tutorials featured in this chapter require a basic understanding of connecting to and using the Web Configurator on your NVG2053. For details, see the included Quick Start Guide. For field descriptions of individual screens, see the related technical reference in this User's Guide. 2.2 Getting Starting with the NVG2053 This quick overview provides pointers on where in this Users Guide you can go to get started with configuring and using the NVG2053. Your NVG2053 may have come pre-configured from your ISP. If such is the case, changing any network settings may affect your ability to get online or connect to other computers on your network. 1 Install the device as described in the included Quick Start Guide. 2 Connect and login to the Web Configurator at its default IP address as described in Section 4.2 on page 59. This is where you configure all available settings related to your device and its network connections. You will most likely need to connect to the NVG2053 directly from your computer rather than over an existing network, since the devices default IP address wont match that networks existing topology. NVG2053 Users Guide 27 Chapter 2 Tutorials 3 Once youre in the Web Configurator, you can assign the NVG2053 a new Local Area Network (LAN) IP address. This allows you to position in your LAN topology where it is most beneficial to you. See Section 9.4 on page 123 for details. 4 5 If you were given settings to configure the NVG2053s WAN connection, then you can do so in Section 7.3 on page 83. Finally, if you have a SIP account and want to place phone calls over the Internet, see Section 2.3 on page 28. 2.3 How to Make a VoIP Call The NVG2053 allows you to plug an analog phone into it and place calls over the Internet to another VoIP device as if you were using an IP Phone or a SIP phone. Making Internet phone calls requries that first have a SIP account set up with either your ISP (if they provide such a service) or a third-party SIP provider. 2.3.1 VoIP Calls With a Registered SIP Account To use a registered SIP account, you should have applied for a SIP account with the VoIP service provider and got account information from your provider. This section shows you examples of how to register your SIP account on the NVG2053 and make Internet calls. The following table shows the SIP account and SIP server address provided by your service provider. SIP Account SIP Server Address User Name Password 12345678@voipprovider.com 127.1.2.3 username123 password123 2.3.1.1 SIP Account Registration Follow the steps below to register and activate your SIP account. 1 Make sure your NVG2053 is connected to the Internet. 2 Open the web configurator and go to VoIP > SIP. 3 Select the SIP service provider profile you want to configure and give it a name
(SIPSP-1 for example). 28 NVG2053 Users Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials 4 Enter the SIP server address (127.1.2.3 in this example). 5 Repeat the SIP server address in the REGISTER Server Address field. 6 Enter the SIP server domain (voipprovider.com in this example) which is the part after the @ symbol in your SIP account. Click Apply. 7 Click VoIP > SIP > SIP Account to enter your SIP account information. 8 The NVG2053 allows you to set up multiple SIP accounts. Click the Add new account button and then select SIP1 to configure the first SIP account. 9 Select the name of the SIP service provider profile you just configured. 10 Select the checkbox to enable the SIP account on the NVG2053. If you do not select this option, then you cannot use the settings configured here for the selected SIP account. 11 Enter the SIP number (12345678 in this example) which is the part before the @
symbol in your SIP account. NVG2053 Users Guide 29 Chapter 2 Tutorials 12 Enter your user name and password. Click Apply to save your changes. 13 The NVG2053 automatically tries to register your SIP account after you click Apply. Go to the Status screen, the Status of the FXS1 interface should be Registered. Check the PHONE LED on the devices top panel. 2.3.1.2 Analog Phone Configuration Next, you must configure your Phone settings to bind your newly configured SIP settings to a single phone. 1 Click VoIP > Phone to open the Phone Device screen. 2 Click the Edit icon of the first entry to configure the first phone port. The phone you choose corresponds to one of two phones physically connected to your NVG2053. 3 Select SIP1 in the SIP Account field of the SIP Account to Make Outgoing Call section to have the phone (connected to the first phone port) use the registered SIP1 account to make outgoing calls. This means any call sent to the selected SIP account is forwarded to the phone port configured here. 4 Select the SIP1 checkbox in the SIP Account(s) to Receive Incoming Call section to have the phone (connected to the first phone port) receive phone calls for the SIP1 account. 30 NVG2053 Users Guide 5 Click Apply to save your changes. Chapter 2 Tutorials 2.3.1.3 Making a VoIP Call 1 Connect a telephone to the first phone port on the NVG2053. 2 Make sure the NVG2053 is on and connected to the Internet. 3 Pick up the handset and hear a dial tone. 4 Dial the SIP phone number you want to call. 2.4 How to Set up a Secure Wireless Network You want to set up a wireless network so that you can use a notebook to access the Internet wirelessly. In this wireless network, the NVG2053 serves as an access point (AP), and the notebook with a wireless network card or USB/PCI adapter is the wireless client. The wireless client can access the Internet through the AP. NVG2053 Users Guide 31 Chapter 2 Tutorials You have to configure the wireless network settings on the NVG2053. Then you can set up a wireless network using WPS (Section 2.4.2 on page 34) or manual configuration (Section 2.4.3 on page 38). 2.4.1 Configuring the Wireless Network Settings This example uses the following parameters to set up a wireless network. SSID Security Mode Pre-Shared Key Operating Mode SSID_Example WPA-PSK DoNotStealMyWirelessNetwork IEEE 802.11b/g/n (Mixed) Follow the steps below to configure the wireless settings on the NVG2053. 1 Open the Network > Wireless LAN > General screen in the NVG2053s web configurator. Configure the screen using the provided parameters (see page 32). 2 Make sure the Enable option is selected. 3 Enter SSID_Example as the SSID and select Auto Channel Selection to have the NVG2053 automatically determine a channel which is not used by another AP. 4 Set security mode to WPA-PSK and enter DoNotStealMyWirelessNetwork in the Pre-Shared Key field. Click Apply. 32 NVG2053 Users Guide 5 Go to the Wireless LAN > Advanced screen, and make sure the Operating Mode is set to Mixed. Click Apply. Chapter 2 Tutorials 6 Open the Status screen.Verify your wireless and wireless security settings under Device Information and check if the WLAN connection is up under Interface Status. NVG2053 Users Guide 33 Chapter 2 Tutorials 7 You can now use the WPS feature to establish a wireless connection between his notebook and the NVG2053 (see Section 2.4.2 on page 34). You can also use the notebooks wireless client to search for the NVG2053 (see Section 2.4.3 on page 38). 8 Click the WLAN Station Status hyperlink in the Status screen. You can see if any wireless client has connected to the NVG2053. 2.4.2 Using WPS This section shows you how to set up a wireless network using WPS. It uses the NVG2053 as the AP and ZyXEL NWD210N as the wireless client which connects to the notebook. Note: The wireless client must be a WPS-aware device (for example, a WPS USB adapter or PCMCIA card). There are two WPS methods to set up the wireless client settings:
Push Button Configuration (PBC) - simply press a button. This is the easier of the two methods. PIN Configuration - configure a Personal Identification Number (PIN) on the NVG2053. A wireless client must also use the same PIN in order to download the wireless network settings from the NVG2053. Push Button Configuration (PBC) 1 Make sure that your NVG2053 is turned on and your notebook is within the cover range of the wireless signal. 2 Make sure that you have installed the wireless client driver and utility in your notebook. 3 Press the WPS button on your notebook within range of the NVG2053. 34 NVG2053 Users Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials 4 The wireless LAN of the NVG2053 is enabled by default, so the WLAN LED lights green. If not, push the WLAN switch to the ON position on the rear panel. When the LED turns green, the wireless LAN is on. Then press the WPS button for more than three seconds and release it. 5 Alternatively, you may log into NVG2053s web configurator and click the Push Button in the Network > Wireless LAN > WPS Station screen. Note: Your NVG2053 has a WPS button located on its top panel as well as a WPS button in its configuration utility. Both buttons have exactly the same function:
you can use one or the other. Note: It doesnt matter which button is pressed first. You must press the second button within 120 seconds of pressing the first one. NVG2053 Users Guide 35 Chapter 2 Tutorials The following figure shows you an example of how to set up a wireless network and its security by pressing a button on both NVG2053 and wireless client. Example WPS Process: PBC Method Wireless Client Access Point WITHIN 120 SECONDS Press and hold for more than 3 seconds SECURITY INFO COMMUNICATION 36 NVG2053 Users Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials PIN Configuration When you use the PIN configuration method, you need to use both the NVG2053s web configurator and the wireless clients utility. 1 Launch your wireless clients configuration utility. Go to the WPS settings and select the PIN method to get a PIN number. 2 Enter the PIN number in the PIN field in the Network > Wireless LAN > WPS Station screen on the NVG2053. 3 Click the Start buttons (or the button next to the PIN field) on both the wireless client utility screen and the NVG2053s WPS Station screen within two minutes. The NVG2053 authenticates the wireless client and sends the proper configuration settings to the wireless client. This may take up to two minutes. The wireless client is then able to communicate with the NVG2053 securely. NVG2053 Users Guide 37 Chapter 2 Tutorials The following figure shows you how to set up a wireless network and its security on a NVG2053 and a wireless client by using PIN method. Example WPS Process: PIN Method Wireless Client Access Point WITHIN 2 MINUTES Authentication by PIN SECURITY INFO COMMUNICATION 2.4.3 Without WPS Use the wireless adapters utility installed on the notebook to search for the SSID_Example SSID. Then enter the DoNotStealMyWirelessNetwork pre-
shared key to establish an wireless Internet connection. 38 NVG2053 Users Guide Note: The NVG2053 supports IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g and IEEE 802.11n wireless clients. Make sure that your notebook or computers wireless adapter supports one of these standards. Chapter 2 Tutorials 2.5 How to Access the NVG2053 Using DDNS If you connect your NVG2053 to the Internet and it uses a dynamic WAN IP address, it is inconvenient for you to manage the device from the Internet. The NVG2053s WAN IP address changes dynamically. Dynamic DNS (DDNS) allows you to access the NVG2053 using a domain name. http://zyxelrouter.dyndns.org A a.b.c.d w.x.y.z To use this feature, you have to apply for DDNS service at www.dyndns.org. This tutorial shows you how to:
Registering a DDNS Account on www.dyndns.org Configuring DDNS on Your NVG2053 Testing the DDNS Setting Note: If you have a private WAN IP address, then you cannot use DDNS. 2.5.1 Registering a DDNS Account on www.dyndns.org 1 Open a browser and type http://www.dyndns.org. 2 Apply for a user account. This tutorial uses UserName1 and 12345 as the username and password. 3 Log into www.dyndns.org using your account. 4 Add a new DDNS host name. This tutorial uses the following settings as an example. Hostname: zyxelrouter.dyndns.org Service Type: Host with IP address NVG2053 Users Guide 39 Chapter 2 Tutorials IP Address: Enter the WAN IP address that your NVG2053 is currently using. You can find the IP address on the NVG2053s Web Configurator Status page. Then you will need to configure the same account and host name on the NVG2053 later. 2.5.2 Configuring DDNS on Your NVG2053 1 Log into the NVG2053's advanced mode. 2 Configure the following settings in the Network > Dynamic DNS screen. 2a Select Enable DDNS. 2b Select WWW.DynDNS.ORG in the Service Provider field. 2c Type zyxelrouter.dyndns.org in the Domain Name field. 2d Enter the user name (UserName1 for example) and password (12345 for example). 2e Select Use WAN IP Address for the IP address update policy. 2f Click Apply. 2.5.3 Testing the DDNS Setting Now you should be able to access the NVG2053 from the Internet. To test this:
1 Open a web browser on the computer (using the IP address a.b.c.d) that is connected to the Internet. 2 Type http://zyxelrouter.dyndns.org and press [Enter]. 40 NVG2053 Users Guide 3 The NVG2053s login page should appear. You can then log into the NVG2053 and manage it. Chapter 2 Tutorials 2.6 How to Route Traffic to Another Network Using Static Route In order to extend your Intranet and control traffic flow directions, you may connect a router (R) to the NVG2053s LAN. The router may be used to separate two department networks. This tutorial shows how to configure a static routing rule for two network routings. In the following figure, router R is connected to the NVG2053s LAN. R connects to two networks, N1 (192.168.1.x/24) and N2 (192.168.10.x/24). If you want to send traffic from computer A (in N1 network) to computer B (in N2 network), the traffic is sent to the NVG2053s WAN default gateway by default. In this case, B will never receive the traffic. N1 A R N2 B NVG2053 Users Guide 41 Chapter 2 Tutorials You need to specify a static routing rule on the NVG2053 to specify R as the router in charge of forwarding traffic to N2. In this case, the NVG2053 routes traffic from A to R and then R routes the traffic to B. N1 A R N2 B This tutorial uses the following example IP settings:
Table 2 IP Settings in this Tutorial DEVICE / COMPUTER The NVG2053s WAN The NVG2053s LAN A Rs N1 Rs N2 B IP ADDRESS 172.16.1.1 192.168.1.1 192.168.1.34 192.168.1.253 192.168.10.2 192.168.10.33 To configure a static route to route traffic from N1 to N2:
1 Log into the NVG2053s Web Configurator. 2 Click Configuration > Network > Static Route. 3 Click the Add Static Route button to create a new rule. 4 Configure the Static Route > Edit screen using the following settings:
42 NVG2053 Users Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials 4a Select Enable. 4b Specify a descriptive name for this routing rule. 4c Type 192.168.10.0 and select subnet mask 255.255.255.0 for the destination, N2. 4d Type 192.168.1.253 (Rs N1 address) in the Gateway IP Address field. 4a Click Apply. Now B should be able to receive traffic from A. You may need to additionally configure Bs firewall settings to allow specific traffic to pass through. 2.7 How to Set Up NAT Port Forwarding You manage the Doom server on a computer behind the NVG2053. In order for players on the Internet to communicate with the Doom server, you need to configure the port settings and IP address on the NVG2053. Traffic should be forwarded to the port 666 of the Doom server computer which has an IP address of 192.168.1.34. D=192.168.1.34 666 LAN WAN NVG2053 Users Guide 43 Chapter 2 Tutorials 1 Click Configuration > Network > NAT to open the General screen. Make sure it is selected to enable NAT on the NVG2053 and click Apply. 2 Click the Port Forwarding tab to open the following screen. Click the Add Port Forward button to create a new rule. 3 Configure the screen as follows to forward port 666 traffic to the computer with IP address 192.168.1.34. Click Apply. 4 The port forwarding settings you configured are listed in the Port Forwarding screen. 44 NVG2053 Users Guide Players on the Internet then can have access to the Doom server. Chapter 2 Tutorials 2.8 How to Use QoS to Prioritize LAN Traffic In this example, your Internet connection has an upstream transmission speed of 50 Mbps. You want to configure a QoS class to assign the high priority queue (6) to VoIP traffic from the phone port(s), so that voice traffic will not get delayed when there is network congestion. Traffic from the bosss IP address
(192.168.1.101 for example) is mapped to queue 5. Traffic that does not match these two classes are assigned priority queue based on the DSCP value in the packets. VoIP: Queue 6 50 Mbps Boss: Queue 5 IP = 192.168.1.101 NVG2053 Users Guide 45 Chapter 2 Tutorials 1 Click Configuration > DHCP Server > Advanced. Enter the MAC address of the bosss computer (00:A0:C5:01:23:45 for example) in the MAC Address field and 192.168.1.101 in the IP Address field to have the NVG2053 always assign the IP address 192.168.1.101 to the bosss computer. Click Apply. 2 Click Network > QoS and select the Enabled option to turn on QoS on the NVG2053. Set DSCP to ON to have the NVG2053 assign priority to unmatched traffic based on the DSCP value in the packets. Click Apply. 46 NVG2053 Users Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials 3 Click Add new Class in the QoS > General scren to create a QoS class for VoIP traffic. 4 Give the class a name (VoIP for example). Set Priority to 6. Select From Interface and then FXS from the drop-down list to group traffic coming from the phone port(s) on the NVG2053. Leave all other fields as the default and click Apply. 5 Click Add new Class in the QoS > General scren to create a QoS class for traffic from the bosss IP address (10.1.1.23 in this example). NVG2053 Users Guide 47 Chapter 2 Tutorials 6 Give the class a name (Boss for example). Set Priority to 5. Select From Interface and the interface to which the bosss computer is connected (WLAN in this example as he or she has a wireless connection to the NVG2053). Select Source Address and then enter the bosss IP address in the field provided. Leave all other fields as the default and click Apply. VoIP traffic now should have higher priority and get through faster than the bosss traffic. 48 NVG2053 Users Guide CHAPTER 3 Connection Wizard 3.1 Overview This chapter provides information on the wizard setup screens in the Web Configurator. The Web Configurators wizard setup helps you configure your device to access the Internet. Refer to your ISP for your Internet account information. Leave a field blank if you dont have that information. 3.2 Accessing the Wizard Launch your web browser and type "http://192.168.1.1" as the website address. Note: The Wizard appears when the NVG2053 is accessed for the first time or when you reset the NVG2053 to its default factory settings. The Wizard screen opens. Choose your Language and click Connect to Internet. Figure 5 Welcome NVG2053 Users Guide 49 Chapter 3 Connection Wizard Note: If you have already configured the wizard screens and want to open it again, click the eaZy123 icon on the upper right corner of any Web Configurator screen. 3.3 Connect to Internet The NVG2053 offers three Internet connection types. They are Static IP, DHCP, and PPPoE. The wizard attempts to detect which WAN connection type you are using. Figure 6 Detecting your Internet Connection Type If the wizard does not detect a connection type, you must select one from the drop-down list box. Check with your ISP to make sure you use the correct type. Note: If you get an error message, check your hardware connections. Make sure your Internet connection is up and running. 50 NVG2053 Users Guide Chapter 3 Connection Wizard The following screen depends on your Internet connection type. Enter the details provided by your Internet Service Provider (ISP) in the fields (if any). Figure 7 Internet Connection Type Your NVG2053 detects the following Internet Connection type. Table 3 Internet Connection Type CONNECTION DESCRIPTION TYPE PPPoE DHCP Static IP Select the PPPoE (Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet) option for a dial-up connection. Select the DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) option when the WAN port is used as a regular Ethernet. Select the Static IP if an administrator assigns the IP address of your computer. 3.3.1 Connection Type: PPPoE Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet (PPPoE) functions as a dial-up connection. PPPoE is an IETF (Internet Engineering Task Force) standard specifying how a host personal computer interacts with a broadband modem (for example DSL, cable, wireless, etc.) to achieve access to high-speed data networks. For the service provider, PPPoE offers an access and authentication method that works with existing access control systems (for instance, RADIUS). One of the benefits of PPPoE is the ability to let end users access one of multiple network services, a function known as dynamic service selection. This enables the service provider to easily create and offer new IP services for specific users. NVG2053 Users Guide 51 Chapter 3 Connection Wizard Operationally, PPPoE saves significant effort for both the subscriber and the ISP/
carrier, as it requires no specific configuration of the broadband modem at the subscriber's site. By implementing PPPoE directly on the NVG2053 (rather than individual computers), the computers on the LAN do not need PPPoE software installed, since the NVG2053 does that part of the task. Furthermore, with NAT, all of the LAN's computers will have Internet access. Figure 8 Internet Connection Type: PPPoE The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Select the PPPoE option for a dial-up connection. Table 4 Internet Connection Type: PPPoE LABEL Internet Connection Type Username Password Exit Back Next Type the user name given to you by your ISP. Type the password associated with the user name above. Click this to close the wizard screen without saving. Click this to return to the previous screen. Click this to continue. 52 NVG2053 Users Guide Chapter 3 Connection Wizard 3.3.2 Connection Type: DHCP Choose DHCP as the Internet Connection Type when the WAN port is used as a regular Ethernet. Click Next. Figure 9 Internet Connection Type: DHCP Note: If you get an error screen after clicking Next, you might have selected the wrong Internet connection type. Click Back, make sure your Internet connection is working and select the right connection type. Contact your ISP if you are not sure of your Internet connection type. 3.3.3 Connection Type: Static IP Choose Static IP as the Internet Connection Type if your ISP assigned an IP address for your Internet connection. Click Next. Figure 10 Internet Connection Type: Static IP NVG2053 Users Guide 53 Chapter 3 Connection Wizard The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Select the Static IP option. Table 5 Internet Connection Type: Static IP LABEL Internet Connection Type IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway Primary DNS Enter the IP address provided by your ISP. Enter the IP subnet mask in this field. Enter the gateway IP address in this field. DNS (Domain Name System) is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it. The NVG2053 uses a system DNS server (in the order you specify here) to resolve domain names for DDNS and the time server. Secondary DNS Exit Back Next Enter the primary DNS server's IP address in the fields provided. Enter the secondary DNS server's IP address in the fields provided. Click this to close the wizard screen without saving. Click this to return to the previous screen. Click this to continue. The NVG2053 connects to the Internet. Figure 11 Connecting to the Internet Note: If the Wizard successfully connects to the Internet, it proceeds to the next step. If you get an error message, go back to the previous screen and make sure you have entered the correct information provided by your ISP. 54 NVG2053 Users Guide Chapter 3 Connection Wizard 3.4 Router Password Change the login password in the following screen. Enter the new password and retype it to confirm. Click Next to proceed with the Wireless Security screen. Figure 12 Router Password 3.5 Wireless Security Configure Wireless Settings. Configure the wireless network settings on your NVG2053 in the following screen. The fields that show up depend on the kind of security you select. NVG2053 Users Guide 55 Chapter 3 Connection Wizard 3.5.1 Wireless Security: No Security Choose No Security in the Wireless Security screen to let wireless devices within range access your wireless network. Figure 13 Wireless Security: No Security The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 6 Wireless Security: No Security LABEL Wireless Network Name
(SSID) DESCRIPTION Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 printable 7-bit ASCII characters) for the wireless LAN. If you change this field on the NVG2053, make sure all wireless stations use the same SSID in order to access the network. Select a security level from the drop-down list box. Choose None to have no wireless LAN security configured. If you do not enable any wireless security on your NVG2053, your network is accessible to any wireless networking device that is within range. Click this to close the wizard screen without saving. Click this to return to the previous screen. Click this to continue. Security mode Exit Back Next 56 NVG2053 Users Guide Chapter 3 Connection Wizard 3.5.2 Wireless Security: WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK Choose WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK security in the Wireless Security screen to set up a password for your wireless network. Figure 14 Wireless Security: WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 7 Wireless Security: WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK LABEL Wireless Network Name
(SSID) DESCRIPTION Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 printable 7-bit ASCII characters) for the wireless LAN. If you change this field on the NVG2053, make sure all wireless stations use the same SSID in order to access the network. Choose WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK security to configure a Pre-Shared Key. Choose this option only if your wireless clients support WPA-PSK or WPA2-
PSK respectively. Type from 8 to 63 case-sensitive ASCII characters. You can set up the most secure wireless connection by configuring WPA in the wireless LAN screens. Retype the password to confirm. Click this to close the wizard screen without saving. Click this to return to the previous screen. Click this to continue. Security mode Wireless password Verify Password Exit Back Next Congratulations! Open a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, to visit your favorite website. NVG2053 Users Guide 57 Chapter 3 Connection Wizard Note: If you cannot access the Internet when your computer is connected to one of the NVG2053s LAN ports, check your connections. Then turn the NVG2053 off, wait for a few seconds then turn it back on. If that does not work, log in to the web configurator again and check you have typed all information correctly. Figure 15 Congratulations You have successfully set up your NVG2053 to operate on your network and access the Internet. You are now ready to connect wirelessly to your NVG2053 and access the Internet. You can click GO to open the login screen to acess the Web Configurator of your NVG2053 for advanced settings. 58 NVG2053 Users Guide CHAPTER 4 Introducing the Web Configurator 4.1 Overview This chapter describes how to access the NVG2053 Web Configurator and provides an overview of its screens. The Web Configurator is an HTML-based management interface that allows easy setup and management of the NVG2053 via Internet browser. Use Internet Explorer 6.0 and later versions or Mozilla Firefox 3 and later versions. The recommended screen resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels. In order to use the Web Configurator you need to allow:
Web browser pop-up windows from your device. Web pop-up blocking is enabled by default in Windows XP SP (Service Pack) 2. JavaScript (enabled by default). Java permissions (enabled by default). Refer to Appendix A on page 235 to see how to make sure these functions are allowed in Internet Explorer. 4.2 Accessing the Web Configurator 1 Make sure your NVG2053 hardware is properly connected and prepare your computer or computer network to connect to the NVG2053 (refer to the Quick Start Guide). 2 3 Launch your web browser. Type "http://192.168.1.1" as the website address. Your computer must be in the same subnet in order to access this website address. NVG2053 Users Guide 59 Chapter 4 Introducing the Web Configurator 4.2.1 Login Screen Note: If this is the first time you are accessing the Web Configurator, you may be redirected to the Wizard. Refer to Chapter 3 on page 49 for the Connection Wizard screens. The Web Configurator initially displays the following login screen. Figure 16 Login screen The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 8 Login screen LABEL Language Password 4.2.1.1 Weather Edit DESCRIPTION Select the language you want to use to configure the Web Configurator. Click Login. Type "1234" (default) as the password. This shows the current weather, either in celsius or fahrenheit, of the city you specify in Section 4.2.1.1 on page 60. This shows the time (hh:mm) and date (yyyy/mm/dd) of the timezone you select in Section 4.2.1.2 on page 61 or Section 22.2 on page 212. The time is in 24-hour format, for example 15:00 is 3:00 PM. You can change the temperature unit and select the location for which you want to know the weather. 60 NVG2053 Users Guide Chapter 4 Introducing the Web Configurator Click the icon to change the Weather display. Figure 17 Change Weather The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 9 Change Weather LABEL Change Unit Change location Select the location for which you want to know the weather. If the city DESCRIPTION Choose which temperature unit you want the NVG2053 to display. Finish you want is not listed, choose one that is closest to it. Click this to apply the settings and refresh the date and time display. 4.2.1.2 Time/Date Edit One timezone can cover more than one country. You can choose a particular country in which the NVG2053 is located and have the NVG2053 display and use the current time and date for its logs. Click the icon to change the time and date display. Figure 18 Change Time Zone Screen The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 10 Change Time Zone Screen LABEL Change time zone Finish DESCRIPTION Select the specific country whose current time and date you want the NVG2053 to display. Click this to apply the settings and refresh the weather display. Note: You can also edit the timezone in Section 22.2 on page 212. NVG2053 Users Guide 61 Chapter 4 Introducing the Web Configurator 4.2.2 Password Screen You should see a screen asking you to change your password (highly recommended) as shown next. Figure 19 Change Password Screen The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 11 Change Password Screen LABEL New Password Retype to Confirm Apply Ignore DESCRIPTION Type a new password. Retype the password for confirmation. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NVG2053. Click Ignore if you do not want to change the password this time. Note: The management session automatically times out when the time period set in the Administrator Inactivity Timer field expires (default five minutes; go to Chapter 20 on page 207 to change this). Simply log back into the NVG2053 if this happens. Right after you log in, the Status screen is displayed. See Chapter 4 on page 81 for more information about the Status screen. 62 NVG2053 Users Guide 4.3 The Web Configurator Layout Chapter 4 Introducing the Web Configurator A C Figure 20 The Web Configurator Layout B D As illustrated above, the Web Configurator screen is divided into these parts:
A - title bar B - navigation panel C - main window D - status bar 4.3.1 Navigation Panel Use the menu items on the navigation panel to open screens to configure NVG2053 features. The following tables describe each menu item. Table 12 Navigation Panel Summary LINK Status Status TAB FUNCTION This screen shows the NVG2053s general device and network status information. Use this screen to access the statistics and client list. Monitor NVG2053 Users Guide 63 Chapter 4 Introducing the Web Configurator Table 12 Navigation Panel Summary LINK Log TAB View Log Log Settings FUNCTION Use these screens to view the logs for the categories that you selected and change your log settings. Use this screen to view information related to your DHCP status. Use this screen to view port status, packet specific statistics, the
"system up time" and so on. Use this screen to view the wireless stations that are currently associated to the NVG2053. Association List DHCP Table Packet Statistics WLAN Station Status Configuration Network Broadband Wireless LAN General MAC Filter Advanced QoS WPS WPS Station Scheduling IP Advanced LAN DHCP Server General Advanced Client List General General Port Forwarding QoS NAT Dynamic DNS Static Route UPnP Security Use this screen to add or remove a WAN connection and configure ISP parameters, WAN IP address assignment, and other advanced properties Use this screen to configure the wireless LAN settings and WLAN authentication/security settings. Use this screen to configure MAC filtering rules. Use this screen to configure the advanced wireless LAN settings. WMM QoS allows you to prioritize wireless traffic according to the delivery requirements of individual services. Use this screen to enable WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) and view the WPS status. Use this screen to use WPS to set up your wireless network. Use this screen to configure the times to enable or disable the wireless LAN. Use this screen to configure NVG2053s LAN IP address. Use this screen to enable IP multicasting for your NVG2053 LAN interface. Use this screen to enable the DHCP server for the LAN. Use this screen to to always assign specific IP addresses to individual MAC addresses (and host names). Use this screen to view current DHCP client information and to always assign specific IP addresses to individual MAC addresses
(and host names). Use this screen to enable QoS and define QoS classes. Use this screen to enable NAT. Use this screen to make your local servers visible to the outside world. This screen allows you to use a static hostname alias for a dynamic IP address. Use this screen to configure IP static routes to tell your device about networks beyond the directly connected remote nodes. Use this screen to turn UPnP on or off. Firewall General Use this screen to activate/deactivate the firewall. 64 NVG2053 Users Guide Chapter 4 Introducing the Web Configurator Table 12 Navigation Panel Summary LINK TAB Services FUNCTION This screen shows a summary of the firewall rules, and allows you to edit/add a firewall rule. VoIP SIP SIP Service Provider SIP Account Phone Phone Device Call Rules Region Speed Dial PSTN call through 3G Connection Setup TR069 Configuration WWW Telent ICMP Password Setup Time Setting USB Services Management TR069 Remote MGMT Maintenance General Password Time Firmware Upgrade Backup/
Restore Language Restart Use this screen to configure the SIP server information, QoS for VoIP calls and dialing interval and timer settings. Use this screen to congiure your SIP account information, dialing plan rules and call features. Use this screen to set which phone ports use which SIP accounts and general phone port settings. Use this screen to select your location and call service mode. Use this screen to configure speed dial for SIP phone numbers that you call often. Use this screen to configure your NVG2053s settings for regular PSTN calls. Use this screen to configure the 3G WAN connection. Use this screen to configure the NVG2053 to be managed by an ACS (Auto Configuration Server). Use this screen to configure through which interface(s) and from which IP address(es) users can use HTTP to manage the NVG2053. Use this screen to configure through which interface(s) and from which IP address(es) users can use Telnet to manage the NVG2053. Use this screen to set whether or not your device will respond to pings. Use this screen to configure your devices name, domain name, and management inactivity timeout. Use this screen to configure your devices password. Use this screen to change your NVG2053s time and date. Use this screen to upload firmware to your device. Use this screen to backup and restore your devices configuration
(settings) or reset the factory default settings. Use this screen to change the Web Configurators display language. Use this screen to reboot the NVG2053 without turning the power off. NVG2053 Users Guide 65 Chapter 4 Introducing the Web Configurator 4.3.2 Main Window The main window displays information and configuration fields. It is discussed in the rest of this document. 4.3.3 Status Bar Check the status bar when you click Apply or OK to verify that the configuration has been updated. 66 NVG2053 Users Guide PART II Technical Reference 67 68 CHAPTER 5 Status Screens 5.1 Overview Use the Status screens to look at the current status of the device, system resources and interfaces (LAN, WAN, WLAN and 3G). The Status screen also provides statistics from traffic. NVG2053 Users Guide 69 Chapter 5 Status Screens 5.2 Status Screen Click Status to open this screen. Figure 21 Status Screen Each field is described in the following table. Table 13 Status Screen LABEL Refresh Interval Refresh Now Device Information DESCRIPTION Enter how often you want the NVG2053 to update this screen. Click this to update this screen immediately. Host Name Model Number Firmware Version WAN Information This field displays the NVG2053 system name. It is used for identification. Click this to go to the screen where you can change it. This is the model name of your device. This field displays the current version of the firmware inside the device. It also shows the date the firmware version was created. 70 NVG2053 Users Guide Chapter 5 Status Screens Table 13 Status Screen LABEL DESCRIPTION This is the MAC (Media Access Control) or Ethernet address unique to your NVG2053. This MAC is used for the WAN connection and is different from the LAN or WLAN MAC. This field displays the current IPv4 address of the NVG2053 in the WAN. This field displays the current subnet mask in the WAN. This field displays the IP address of the default gateway, if applicable. This field displays the method of encapsulation used by the WAN connection. This is the MAC (Media Access Control) or Ethernet address unique to your NVG2053. This MAC is used for LAN connections and differs from the WLAN or WAN MAC. This field displays the current IPv4 address of the NVG2053 in the LAN. Click this to go to the screen where you can change it. This field displays the current subnet mask in the LAN. This field displays whether the NVG2053 acts as a DHCP server and assigns IP addresses to other computers in the LAN (Enable) or not
(Disable). Click this to go to the screen where you can change it. This is the MAC (Media Access Control) or Ethernet address unique to your NVG2053. This MAC is used for WLAN connections and differs from the LAN or WAN MAC. This is the descriptive name used to identify the NVG2053 in this wireless network. Click this to go to the screen where you can change it. This is the channel number used by the NVG2053 now. This shows the level of wireless security the NVG2053 is using in this wireless network. This displays whether or not the NVG2053s firewall is activated. Click this to go to the screen where you can change it. Click this link to view packet specific statistics of the WAN connection(s). See Section 6.5 on page 77. Click this link to display the MAC address(es) of the wireless stations that are currently associating with the NVG2053. See Section 6.6 on page 79. MAC Address IP Address IP Subnet Mask Default Gateway Encapsulatio n LAN Information MAC Address IP Address IP Subnet Mask DHCP WLAN Information MAC Address SSID Channel Security Security Mode Firewall Summary Packet Statistics WLAN Station Status System Status NVG2053 Users Guide 71 Chapter 5 Status Screens Table 13 Status Screen LABEL System Uptime Current Date/Time System Resource CPU Usage Memory Usage DESCRIPTION This field displays how long the NVG2053 has been running since it last started up. The NVG2053 starts up when you plug it in, when you restart it, or when you reset it using the Maintenance > Backup/
Restore screen or the RESET button (see Section 1.6 on page 25). This field displays the current date and time in the NVG2053. You can change this in Maintenance > Time. This field displays what percentage of the NVG2053s processing ability is currently used. When this percentage is close to 100%, the NVG2053 is running at full load, and the throughput is not going to improve anymore. If you want some applications to have more throughput, you should turn off other applications (for example, using QoS; see Chapter 11 on page 131). This field displays what percentage of the NVG2053s memory is currently used. Usually, this percentage should not increase much. If memory usage does get close to 100%, the NVG2053 is probably becoming unstable, and you should restart the device. See Section 26.3 on page 223, or turn off the device (unplug the power) for a few seconds. Interface Status Interface Status This column displays each interface the NVG2053 has. This field indicates whether or not the NVG2053 is using the interface. For the LAN or Ethernet WAN interface, this field displays Up when the NVG2053 is using the interface and Down when the line is disconnected. For the WLAN interface, it displays Active when WLAN is enabled or Down when WLAN is not active. For the FXO interface, it displays Off when the LINE port is disconnected, and On when the LINE port is connected. For the FXS interface, it displays:
Registered when the PHONE port is connected and the SIP account used by the phone attached to this PHONE port is active and registered. Unegistered when the PHONE port is disconnected and/or the SIP account used by the phone attached to this PHONE port is not active or not registered. Rate For the LAN or Ethernet WAN interface, this displays the port speed or N/A when the interface is not connected. For the WLAN interface, it displays the maximum transmission rate when WLAN is enabled or N/A when WLAN is disabled. 3G Status 72 NVG2053 Users Guide Chapter 5 Status Screens Table 13 Status Screen LABEL Signal Strength DESCRIPTION This field displays the signal strength of the 3G network to which the 3G card on the NVG2053 is connecting. The signal strength mainly depends on the antenna output power and the distance between your NVG2053 and the service providers base station. This field displays the manufacturer of your 3G card. 3G Card Manufacturer 3G Card Model 3G Card IMEI This field displays the International Mobile Equipment Number (IMEI) This field displays the model name of your 3G card. which is the serial number of the 3G wireless card. IMEI is a unique 15-
digit number used to identify a mobile device. 3G Card IMSI This field displays the International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI) stored in the SIM (Subscriber Identity Module) card. The SIM card is installed in a mobile device and used for authenticating a customer to the carrier network. IMSI is a unique 15-digit number used to identify a user on a network. NVG2053 Users Guide 73 Chapter 5 Status Screens 74 NVG2053 Users Guide CHAPTER 6 Monitor 6.1 Overview This chapter discusses read-only information related to the device state of the NVG2053. Note: To access the Monitor screens, you can also click the links in the Summary table of the Status screen to view packets sent/received on a WAN connection as well as the status of wireless clients connected to the NVG2053. 6.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the View Log screen (Section 6.2 on page 75) to see the logs for the categories that you selected in the Log Settings screen. Use the Log Settings screen (Section 6.3 on page 76) to configure which logs and/or immediate alerts the NVG2053 is to record. Use the DHCP Table screen (Section 6.4 on page 77) to view information related to your DHCP status. use the Packet Statistics screen (Section 6.5 on page 77) to view port status, packet specific statistics, the "system up time" and so on. Use the WLAN Station Status screen (Section 6.6 on page 79) to view the wireless stations that are currently associated to the NVG2053. 6.2 The View Log Screen Click Monitor > Log to open the View Log screen. Use the View Log screen to see the logs for the categories that you selected in the Log Settings screen (see Section 6.3 on page 76). NVG2053 Users Guide 75 Chapter 6 Monitor The log wraps around and deletes the old entries after it fills. Figure 22 Monitor > Log > View Log The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 14 Monitor > Log > View Log LABEL Display DESCRIPTION Select a category of logs to view. Select All Logs to view logs from all of the log categories that you selected in the Log Settings screen. Click Refresh to renew the log screen. Click Clear Log to delete all the logs. The logs display in the table. This field is a sequential value and is not associated with a specific entry. This field displays the time the log was recorded. This field states the reason for the log. Refresh Clear Log Summary
Time Message 6.3 The Log Settings Screen Use the Log Settings screen to choose which categories of events and/or alerts the NVG2053 is to log and then display the logs. To change your NVG2053s log settings, click Monitor > Log > Log Settings. The screen appears as shown. Figure 23 Monitor > Log > Log Settings 76 NVG2053 Users Guide 6.4 The DHCP Table Scren Chapter 6 Monitor DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, RFC 2131 and RFC 2132) allows individual clients to obtain TCP/IP configuration at start-up from a server. You can configure the NVG2053 as a DHCP server or disable it. When configured as a server, the NVG2053 provides the TCP/IP configuration for the clients. If DHCP service is disabled, you must have another DHCP server on that network, or else the computer must be manually configured. Click Monitor > DHCP Table. Read-only information here relates to your DHCP status. The DHCP table shows current DHCP client information (including IP Address, Host Name and MAC Address) of all network clients using the NVG2053s DHCP server. Figure 24 DHCP Table The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 15 DHCP Table LABEL
IP Address Host Name MAC Address This field shows the MAC address of the client computer. DESCRIPTION This is the index number of the host computer. This indicates the IP address assigned to this client computer. This indicates the computer host name. Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address which uniquely identifies a device. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. 6.5 The Packet Statistics Screen Click Monitor > Packet Statistics or the Packet Statistics (Details...) hyperlink in the Status screen. Read-only information here includes WAN port NVG2053 Users Guide 77 Chapter 6 Monitor status, packet specific statistics, system information and the "system up time". The Poll Interval(s) field is configurable and is used for refreshing the screen. Figure 25 Packet Statistics The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Table 16 Packet Statistics LABEL System Monitor System Up Time Current Date/
Time CPU Usage Memory Usage WAN Port Statistics Link Status This is the total time the NVG2053 has been on. This field displays your NVG2053s present date and time. This field specifies the percentage of CPU utilization. This field specifies the percentage of memory utilization. WAN IP Address Node Link Status TxPkts RxPkts Collisions Tx B/s Rx B/s This displays the port speed and duplex setting or Down when the line is disconnected. This is the IP address of the NVG2053s WAN port. This field displays the descriptive name of the WAN connection. This field shows whether the WAN connection is up or down. This is the number of transmitted packets on this connection. This is the number of received packets on this connection. This is the number of collisions on this connection. This displays the transmission speed in bytes per second on this connection. This displays the reception speed in bytes per second on this connection. 78 NVG2053 Users Guide Chapter 6 Monitor Table 16 Packet Statistics LABEL Up Time Poll Interval(s) Set Interval Stop DESCRIPTION This is the total time the NVG2053 has been for each session. Enter the time interval in seconds for refreshing statistics in this field. Click this button to apply the new poll interval you entered in the Poll Interval(s) field. Click Stop to stop refreshing statistics. 6.6 The WLAN Station Status Screen Click Monitor > WLAN Station Status or the WLAN Station Status
(Details...) hyperlink in the Status screen. View the wireless stations that are currently associated to the NVG2053 in the Association List. Association means that a wireless client (for example, your network or computer with a wireless network card) has connected successfully to the AP (or wireless router) using the same SSID, channel and security settings. Figure 26 Summary: Wireless Association List The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 17 Summary: Wireless Association List LABEL
MAC Address Association Time DESCRIPTION This is the index number of an associated wireless station. This field displays the MAC address of an associated wireless station. This field displays the time and date a wireless station first associated with the NVG2053s WLAN network. NVG2053 Users Guide 79 Chapter 6 Monitor 80 NVG2053 Users Guide CHAPTER 7 Broadband 7.1 Overview This chapter discusses the NVG2053s Broadband screens. Use these screens to configure your NVG2053 for Internet access. A WAN (Wide Area Network) connection is an outside connection to another network or the Internet. It connects your private networks such as a LAN (Local Area Network) and other networks, so that a computer in one location can communicate with computers in other locations. Figure 27 LAN and WAN LAN WAN See Section 7.4 on page 90 for advanced technical information on WAN. 7.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the Broadband screen (Section 7.3 on page 83) to view and configure the WAN settings on the NVG2053 for Internet access. 7.2 What You Need To Know The information in this section can help you configure the screens for your WAN connection, as well as enable/disable some advanced features of your NVG2053. NVG2053 Users Guide 81 Chapter 7 Broadband Encapsulation Method Encapsulation is used to include data from an upper layer protocol into a lower layer protocol. To set up a WAN connection to the Internet, you need to use the same encapsulation method used by your ISP (Internet Service Provider). If your ISP offers a dial-up Internet connection using PPPoE (PPP over Ethernet), they should also provide a username and password (and service name) for user authentication. WAN IP Address The WAN IP address is an IP address for the NVG2053, which makes it accessible from an outside network. It is used by the NVG2053 to communicate with other devices in other networks. It can be static (fixed) or dynamically assigned by the ISP each time the NVG2053 tries to access the Internet. If your ISP assigns you a static WAN IP address, they should also assign you the subnet mask and DNS server IP address(es) and a gateway IP address. DNS Server Address Assignment Use Domain Name System (DNS) to map a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa, for instance, the IP address of www.zyxel.com is 204.217.0.2. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it. The NVG2053 can get the DNS server addresses in the following ways. 1 2 The ISP tells you the DNS server addresses, usually in the form of an information sheet, when you sign up. If your ISP gives you DNS server addresses, manually enter them in the DNS server fields. If your ISP dynamically assigns the DNS server IP addresses (along with the NVG2053s WAN IP address), set the DNS server fields to get the DNS server address from the ISP. 82 NVG2053 Users Guide Chapter 7 Broadband 7.3 The Broadband Screen Use this screen to change your NVG2053s Internet access settings. Click Network > Broadband from the Configuration menu. The summary table shows you the configured WAN services (connections) on the NVG2053. Figure 28 Network > Broadband The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 18 Network > Broadband DESCRIPTION LABEL Add new WAN Click this button to create a new connection. interface
Name Mode Encapsulation 8021p This is the index number of the connection. This is the service name of the connection. This shows whether the connection is in routing mode or bridge mode. This shows the method of encapsulation used by this connection. This indicates the 802.1P priority level assigned to traffic sent through this connection. VLAN tag This field is blank when there is no priority level assigned. This indicates the VLAN ID number assigned to traffic sent through this connection. IGMP Proxy NAT Default Gateway Modify Apply Cancel This field is blank when there is no VLAN ID number assigned. This shows whether the NVG2053 act as an IGMP proxy on this connection. This shows whether NAT is activated or not for this connection. This shows whether the NVG2053 use the WAN interface of this connection as the system default gateway. Click the Edit icon to configure the WAN connection. Click the Delete icon to remove the WAN connection. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NVG2053. Click Cancel to return to the previous configuration. NVG2053 Users Guide 83 Chapter 7 Broadband 7.3.1 Broadband Configuration Click the Edit or Add button in the Broadband screen to configure a WAN connection. The screen differs according to the mode and encapsulation you choose. 7.3.1.1 DHCP This screen displays when you select the Routing mode and DHCP encapsulation. Figure 29 Network > Broadband: DHCP Encapsulation The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 19 Network > Broadband: DHCP Encapsulation LABEL General Name DESCRIPTION Specify a descriptive name of up to 15 alphanumeric characters for this connection. 84 NVG2053 Users Guide Chapter 7 Broadband Table 19 Network > Broadband: DHCP Encapsulation LABEL Mode DESCRIPTION Select Routing (default) from the drop-down list box if your ISP give you one IP address only and you want multiple computers to share an Internet account. Select Bridge when your ISP provides you more than one IP address and you want the connected computers to get individual IP address from ISPs DHCP server directly. If you select Bridge, you cannot use routing functions, such as QoS, Firewall, DHCP server and NAT on traffic from the selected LAN port(s). You must choose the DHCP (Ethernet) option when the WAN port is used as a regular Ethernet. A static IP address is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you. A dynamic IP address is not fixed; the ISP assigns you a different one each time you connect to the Internet. Select this if you have a dynamic IP address. Select this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address. Enter the static IP address provided by your ISP. Enter the subnet mask provided by your ISP. Enter the gateway IP address provided by your ISP. Select this option to activate NAT on this connection. Internet Group Multicast Protocol (IGMP) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. Select this option to have the NVG2053 act as an IGMP proxy on this connection. This allows the NVG2053 to get subscribing information and maintain a joined member list for each multicast group. It can reduce multicast traffic significantly. Select this option to have the NVG2053 use the WAN interface of this connection as the system default gateway. This field is not configurable when another connection has been set to be the deafult gateway through which the NVG2053 forwards the traffic. Select Obtained From ISP if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server information (and the NVG2053's WAN IP address). The field to the right displays the (read-only) DNS server IP address that the ISP assigns. Select UserDefined if you have the IP address of a DNS server. Enter the DNS server's IP address in the field to the right. Select None if you do not want to configure DNS servers. If you do not configure a DNS server, you must know the IP address of a computer in order to access it. Encapsulation IP Address Obtain an IP Address Automatically Static IP Address IP Address IP Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address Routing Feature NAT Enable IGMP Proxy Enable Apply as Default Gateway DNS Server First DNS Server Second DNS Server Third DNS Server VLAN NVG2053 Users Guide 85 Chapter 7 Broadband Table 19 Network > Broadband: DHCP Encapsulation LABEL VLAN DESCRIPTION Select Enable to add the VLAN tag (specified below) to the outgoing traffic through this connection. Otherwise, select Disable. IEEE 802.1p defines up to 8 separate traffic types by inserting a tag into a MAC-layer frame that contains bits to define class of service. 802.1p VLAN TAG Back Apply Cancel Type the IEEE 802.1p priority level (from 0 to 7) to add to traffic through this connection. The greater the number, the higher the priority level. This field is configurable when you select Enable in the VLAN field. Type the VLAN ID number (from 1 to 4094) for traffic through this connection. This field is configurable when you select Enable in the VLAN field. Click Back to return to the previous screen. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NVG2053. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 7.3.2 PPPoE Encapsulation The NVG2053 supports PPPoE (Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet). PPPoE is an IETF standard (RFC 2516) specifying how a personal computer (PC) interacts with a broadband modem (DSL, cable, wireless, etc.) connection. The PPPoE option is for a dial-up connection using PPPoE. For the service provider, PPPoE offers an access and authentication method that works with existing access control systems (for example Radius). One of the benefits of PPPoE is the ability to let you access one of multiple network services, a function known as dynamic service selection. This enables the service provider to easily create and offer new IP services for individuals. Operationally, PPPoE saves significant effort for both you and the ISP or carrier, as it requires no specific configuration of the broadband modem at the customer site. By implementing PPPoE directly on the NVG2053 (rather than individual computers), the computers on the LAN do not need PPPoE software installed, since the NVG2053 does that part of the task. Furthermore, with NAT, all of the LANs computers will have access. 86 NVG2053 Users Guide Chapter 7 Broadband This screen displays when you select the Routing mode and PPPoE encapsulation. Figure 30 Network > Broadband: PPPoE Encapsulation The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 20 Network > Broadband: PPPoE Encapsulation LABEL General Name DESCRIPTION Mode Encapsulation PPP Information PPP Username Specify a descriptive name of up to 15 alphanumeric characters for this connection. Select Routing (default) from the drop-down list box if your ISP give you one IP address only and you want multiple computers to share an Internet account. Select Bridge when your ISP provides you more than one IP address and you want the connected computers to get individual IP address from ISPs DHCP server directly. If you select Bridge, you cannot use routing functions, such as QoS, Firewall, DHCP server and NAT on traffic from the selected LAN port(s). Select PPPoE for a dial-up connection. Enter the user name exactly as your ISP assigned. If assigned a name in the form user@domain where domain identifies a service name, then enter both components exactly as given. NVG2053 Users Guide 87 Chapter 7 Broadband Table 20 Network > Broadband: PPPoE Encapsulation LABEL PPP Password PPP Auto Connect IDLE Timeout DESCRIPTION Enter the password associated with the user name above. Select this option if you do not want the connection to time out. This value specifies the time in minutes that elapses before the router automatically disconnects from the PPPoE server. PPPoE Service Name Routing Feature NAT Enable IGMP Proxy Enable Apply as Default Gateway DNS Server First DNS Server Second DNS Server Third DNS Server VLAN VLAN 802.1p VLAN TAG This field is not configurable if you select PPP Auto Connect. Enter the name of your PPPoE service here. Select this option to activate NAT on this connection. Internet Group Multicast Protocol (IGMP) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. Select this option to have the NVG2053 act as an IGMP proxy on this connection. This allows the NVG2053 to get subscribing information and maintain a joined member list for each multicast group. It can reduce multicast traffic significantly. Select this option to have the NVG2053 use the WAN interface of this connection as the system default gateway. This field is not configurable when another connection has been set to be the deafult gateway through which the NVG2053 forwards the traffic. Select Obtained From ISP if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server information (and the NVG2053's WAN IP address). The field to the right displays the (read-only) DNS server IP address that the ISP assigns. Select UserDefined if you have the IP address of a DNS server. Enter the DNS server's IP address in the field to the right. Select None if you do not want to configure DNS servers. If you do not configure a DNS server, you must know the IP address of a computer in order to access it. Select Enable to add the VLAN tag (specified below) to the outgoing traffic through this connection. Otherwise, select Disable. IEEE 802.1p defines up to 8 separate traffic types by inserting a tag into a MAC-layer frame that contains bits to define class of service. Type the IEEE 802.1p priority level (from 0 to 7) to add to traffic through this connection. The greater the number, the higher the priority level. This field is configurable when you select Enable in the VLAN field. Type the VLAN ID number (from 1 to 4094) for traffic through this connection. This field is configurable when you select Enable in the VLAN field. 88 NVG2053 Users Guide Chapter 7 Broadband Table 20 Network > Broadband: PPPoE Encapsulation LABEL Back Apply Cancel DESCRIPTION Click Back to return to the previous screen. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NVG2053. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 7.3.2.1 Bridge This screen displays when you select the Bridge mode. Figure 31 Network > Broadband: Bridge mode The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 21 Network > Broadband: Bridge mode LABEL General Name DESCRIPTION Specify a descriptive name of up to 15 alphanumeric characters for this connection. Select Routing (default) from the drop-down list box if your ISP give you one IP address only and you want multiple computers to share an Internet account. Select Bridge when your ISP provides you more than one IP address and you want the connected computers to get individual IP address from ISPs DHCP server directly. If you select Bridge, you cannot use routing functions, such as QoS, Firewall, DHCP server and NAT on traffic from the selected LAN port(s). Select the LAN port(s) from which traffic will be forwarded to the WAN interface directly. You cannot configure a QoS class for traffic from the LAN port which is selected here. Mode Bridged VLAN VLAN NVG2053 Users Guide 89 Chapter 7 Broadband Table 21 Network > Broadband: Bridge mode LABEL VLAN DESCRIPTION Select Enable to add the VLAN tag (specified below) to the outgoing traffic through this connection. Otherwise, select Disable. IEEE 802.1p defines up to 8 separate traffic types by inserting a tag into a MAC-layer frame that contains bits to define class of service. 802.1p VLAN TAG Back Apply Cancel Type the IEEE 802.1p priority level (from 0 to 7) to add to traffic through this connection. The greater the number, the higher the priority level. This field is configurable when you select Enable in the VLAN field. Type the VLAN ID number (from 1 to 4094) for traffic through this connection. This field is configurable when you select Enable in the VLAN field. Click Back to return to the previous screen. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NVG2053. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 7.4 Technical Reference The following section contains additional technical information about the NVG2053 features described in this chapter. Introduction to VLANs A Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks. Devices on a logical network belong to one group. A device can belong to more than one group. With VLAN, a device cannot directly talk to or hear from devices that are not in the same group(s); the traffic must first go through a router. In Multi-Tenant Unit (MTU) applications, VLAN is vital in providing isolation and security among the subscribers. When properly configured, VLAN prevents one subscriber from accessing the network resources of another on the same LAN, thus a user will not see the printers and hard disks of another user in the same building. VLAN also increases network performance by limiting broadcasts to a smaller and more manageable logical broadcast domain. In traditional switched environments, all broadcast packets go to each and every individual port. With VLAN, all broadcasts are confined to a specific broadcast domain. 90 NVG2053 Users Guide Chapter 7 Broadband Introduction to IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLAN A tagged VLAN uses an explicit tag (VLAN ID) in the MAC header to identify the VLAN membership of a frame across bridges - they are not confined to the switch on which they were created. The VLANs can be created statically by hand or dynamically through GVRP. The VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that switches need to process the frame across the network. A tagged frame is four bytes longer than an untagged frame and contains two bytes of TPID (Tag Protocol Identifier), residing within the type/
length field of the Ethernet frame) and two bytes of TCI (Tag Control Information), starts after the source address field of the Ethernet frame). The CFI (Canonical Format Indicator) is a single-bit flag, always set to zero for Ethernet switches. If a frame received at an Ethernet port has a CFI set to 1, then that frame should not be forwarded as it is to an untagged port. The remaining twelve bits define the VLAN ID, giving a possible maximum number of 4,096 VLANs. Note that user priority and VLAN ID are independent of each other. A frame with VID (VLAN Identifier) of null (0) is called a priority frame, meaning that only the priority level is significant and the default VID of the ingress port is given as the VID of the frame. Of the 4096 possible VIDs, a VID of 0 is used to identify priority frames and value 4095 (FFF) is reserved, so the maximum possible VLAN configurations are 4,094. TPID User Priority CFI VLAN ID 2 Bytes 3 Bits 1 Bit 12 Bits Multicast IP packets are transmitted in either one of two ways - Unicast (1 sender - 1 recipient) or Broadcast (1 sender - everybody on the network). Multicast delivers IP packets to a group of hosts on the network - not everybody and not just 1. Internet Group Multicast Protocol (IGMP) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. IGMP version 2 (RFC 2236) is an improvement over version 1 (RFC 1112) but IGMP version 1 is still in wide use. If you would like to read more detailed information about interoperability between IGMP version 2 and version 1, please see sections 4 and 5 of RFC 2236. The class D IP address is used to identify host groups and can be in the range 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. The address 224.0.0.0 is not assigned to any group and is used by IP multicast computers. The address 224.0.0.1 is used for query messages and is assigned to the permanent group of all IP hosts (including gateways). All hosts must join the 224.0.0.1 group in order to participate in IGMP. The address 224.0.0.2 is assigned to the multicast routers group. NVG2053 Users Guide 91 Chapter 7 Broadband At start up, the NVG2053 queries all directly connected networks to gather group membership. After that, the NVG2053 periodically updates this information. 92 NVG2053 Users Guide CHAPTER 8 Wireless LAN 8.1 Overview This chapter discusses how to configure the wireless network settings in your NVG2053. The following figure provides an example of a wireless network. Figure 32 Example of a Wireless Network A B The wireless network is the part in the blue circle. In this wireless network, devices A and B are called wireless clients. The wireless clients use the access point (AP) to interact with other devices (such as the printer) or with the Internet. Your NVG2053 is the AP. See Chapter 2 on page 33 for a tutorial showing how to set up your wireless connection in an example scenario. NVG2053 Users Guide 93 Chapter 8 Wireless LAN See Section 8.10 on page 111 and Appendix C on page 275 for advanced technical information on wireless networks. 8.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the General screen (Section 8.3 on page 97) to enable the Wireless LAN, enter the SSID and select the wireless security mode. Use the MAC Filter screen (Section 8.4 on page 104) to allow or deny wireless clients based on their MAC addresses from connecting to the NVG2053. Use the Advanced screen (Section 8.5 on page 105) to allow wireless advanced features, such as intra-BSS networking and set the RTS/CTS Threshold. Use the QoS screen (Section 8.6 on page 107) to have the NVG2053 automatically set priority levels to services, such as e-mail, VoIP, chat, and so on. The WPS screen and the WPS Station screen let you use WiFi Protected Setup
(WPS) to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security, without having to configure security settings manually. Use the WPS screen (Section 8.7 on page 107) to enable or disable WPS, generate a security PIN (Personal Identification Number) and see information about the NVG2053s WPS status. Use the WPS Station (Section 8.8 on page 109) screen to add a wireless client by pressing a button or using a PIN. Use the Scheduling screen (Section 8.9 on page 110) to set the times your wireless LAN is turned on and off. 8.2 What You Need to Know Every wireless network must follow these basic guidelines. Every wireless client in the same wireless network must use the same SSID. The SSID is the name of the wireless network. It stands for Service Set IDentity. If two wireless networks overlap, they should use different channels. Like radio stations or television channels, each wireless network uses a specific channel, or frequency, to send and receive information. Every wireless client in the same wireless network must use security compatible with the AP. Security stops unauthorized devices from using the wireless network. It can also protect the information that is sent in the wireless network. Wireless Basics Wireless is essentially radio communication. In the same way that walkie-talkie radios send and receive information over the airwaves, wireless networking 94 NVG2053 Users Guide Chapter 8 Wireless LAN devices exchange information with one another. A wireless networking device is just like a radio that lets your computer exchange information with radios attached to other computers. Like walkie-talkies, most wireless networking devices operate at radio frequency bands that are open to the public and do not require a license to use. However, wireless networking is different from that of most traditional radio communications in that there a number of wireless networking standards available with different methods of data encryption. Wireless Network Construction Wireless networks consist of wireless clients, access points and bridges. A wireless client is a radio connected to a users computer. An access point is a radio with a wired connection to a network, which can connect with numerous wireless clients and let them access the network. A bridge is a radio that relays communications between access points and wireless clients, extending a networks range. Traditionally, a wireless network operates in one of two ways. An infrastructure type of network has one or more access points and one or more wireless clients. The wireless clients connect to the access points. An ad-hoc type of network is one in which there is no access point. Wireless clients connect to one another in order to exchange information. Network Names Each network must have a name, referred to as the SSID - Service Set IDentifier. The service set is the network, so the service set identifier is the networks name. This helps you identify your wireless network when wireless networks coverage areas overlap and you have a variety of networks to choose from. Radio Channels In the radio spectrum, there are certain frequency bands allocated for unlicensed, civilian use. For the purposes of wireless networking, these bands are divided into numerous channels. This allows a variety of networks to exist in the same place without interfering with one another. When you create a network, you must select a channel to use. Since the available unlicensed spectrum varies from one country to another, the number of available channels also varies. NVG2053 Users Guide 95 Chapter 8 Wireless LAN Wireless Security By their nature, radio communications are simple to intercept. For wireless data networks, this means that anyone within range of a wireless network without security can not only read the data passing over the airwaves, but also join the network. Once an unauthorized person has access to the network she/he can either steal information or introduce malware (malicious software) intended to compromise the network. For these reasons, a variety of security systems have been developed to ensure that only authorized people can use a wireless data network, or understand the data carried on it. These security standards do two things. First, they authenticate. This means that only people presenting the right credentials (often a username and password, or a key phrase) can access the network. Second, they encrypt. This means that the information sent over the air is encoded. Only people with the code key can understand the information, and only people who have been authenticated are given the code key. These security standards vary in effectiveness. Some can be broken, such as the old Wired Equivalent Protocol (WEP). Using WEP is better than using no security at all, but it will not keep a determined attacker out. Other security standards are secure in themselves but can be broken if a user does not use them properly. For example, the WPA-PSK security standard is perfectly secure if you use a long key which is difficult for an attackers software to guess - for example, a twenty-letter long string of apparently random numbers and letters - but it is not very secure if you use a short key which is very easy to guess. Because of the damage that can be done by a malicious attacker, its not just people who have sensitive information on their network who should use security. Everybody who uses any wireless network should ensure that effective security is in place. A good way to come up with effective security keys, passwords and so on is to use obscure information that you personally will easily remember, and to enter it in a way that appears random and does not include real words. For example, if your mother owns a 1970 Dodge Challenger and her favorite movie is Vanishing Point
(which you know was made in 1971) you could use 70dodchal71vanpoi as your security key. Signal Problems Because wireless networks are radio networks, their signals are subject to limitations of distance, interference and absorption. Problems with distance occur when the two radios are too far apart. Problems with interference occur when other radio waves interrupt the data signal. Interference may come from other radio transmissions, such as military or air traffic control 96 NVG2053 Users Guide communications, or from machines that are coincidental emitters such as electric motors or microwaves. Problems with absorption occur when physical objects
(such as thick walls) are between the two radios, muffling the signal. Chapter 8 Wireless LAN 8.3 General Wireless LAN Screen Use this screen to enable the Wireless LAN, enter the SSID and select the wireless security mode. Note: If you are configuring the NVG2053 from a computer connected to the wireless LAN and you change the NVG2053s SSID, channel or security settings, you will lose your wireless connection when you press Apply to confirm. You must then change the wireless settings of your computer to match the NVG2053s new settings. Click Network > Wireless LAN to open the General screen. Figure 33 Network > Wireless LAN > General The following table describes the general wireless LAN labels in this screen. Table 22 Network > Wireless LAN > General LABEL Wireless Setup Wireless LAN This is turned on by default. DESCRIPTION Name(SSID) You can turn the wireless LAN on or off using the switch at the rear panel of the NVG2053. The current wireless state is reflected in this field. The SSID (Service Set IDentity) identifies the service set with which a wireless device is associated. Wireless devices associating to the access point (AP) must have the same SSID. Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 English keyboard characters) for the wireless LAN. NVG2053 Users Guide 97 Chapter 8 Wireless LAN Table 22 Network > Wireless LAN > General LABEL Hide SSID Channel Selection Auto Channel Selection Operating Channel Security Security Mode DESCRIPTION Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a station cannot obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool. Select a channel from the drop-down list box. The options vary depending on the frequency band and the country you are in. If you are having problems with wireless interference, changing the channel may help. Try to use a channel that is as many channels away from any channels used by neighboring APs as possible. This option is only available if Auto Channel Selection is disabled. Select this option to have the NVG2053 automatically determine a channel to use. This displays the channel the NVG2053 is currently using. Select Static WEP, WPA-PSK, WPA, WPA2-PSK or WPA2 to add security on this wireless network. The wireless clients which want to associate to this network must have same wireless security settings as the NVG2053. After you select to use a security, additional options appears in this screen. Or you can select No Security to allow any client to associate this network without any data encryption or authentication. Apply Cancel See the following sections for more details about this field. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NVG2053. Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen. 8.3.1 No Security Select No Security to allow wireless stations to communicate with the access points without any data encryption or authentication. 98 NVG2053 Users Guide Chapter 8 Wireless LAN Note: If you do not enable any wireless security on your NVG2053, your network is accessible to any wireless networking device that is within range. Figure 34 Network > Wireless LAN > General: No Security The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 23 Network > Wireless LAN > General: No Security LABEL Security Mode DESCRIPTION Choose No Security from the drop-down list box. 8.3.2 WEP Encryption Your NVG2053 allows you to configure up to four 64-bit or 128-bit WEP keys but only one key can be enabled at any one time. NVG2053 Users Guide 99 Chapter 8 Wireless LAN In order to configure and enable WEP encryption, click Network > Wireless LAN to display the General screen. Select Static WEP from the Security Mode list. Figure 35 Network > Wireless LAN > General: Static WEP The following table describes the wireless LAN security labels in this screen. Table 24 Network > Wireless LAN > General: Static WEP LABEL Security Mode PassPhrase DESCRIPTION Select Static WEP to enable data encryption. Enter a Passphrase (up to 26 printable characters) and click Generate. A passphrase functions like a password. In WEP security mode, it is further converted by the NVG2053 into a complicated string that is referred to as the key. This key is requested from all devices wishing to connect to a wireless network. Select 64-bits or 128-bits. This dictates the length of the security key that the network is going to use. WEP Encryption 100 NVG2053 Users Guide Chapter 8 Wireless LAN Table 24 Network > Wireless LAN > General: Static WEP LABEL Authenticatio n Method DESCRIPTION Select Auto or Shared Key from the drop-down list box. This field specifies whether the wireless clients have to provide the WEP key to login to the wireless network. Keep this setting at Auto unless you want to force a key verification before communication between the wireless client and the NVG2053 occurs. Select Shared Key to force the clients to provide the WEP key prior to communication. Select this option in order to enter ASCII characters as WEP key. Select this option in order to enter hexadecimal characters as a WEP key. ASCII HEX The preceding "0x", that identifies a hexadecimal key, is entered automatically. The WEP keys are used to encrypt data. Both the NVG2053 and the wireless stations must use the same WEP key for data transmission. Key 1 to Key 4 If you chose 64-bits, then enter any 5 ASCII characters or 10 hexadecimal characters ("0-9", "A-F"). If you chose 128-bits, then enter 13 ASCII characters or 26 hexadecimal characters ("0-9", "A-F"). You must configure at least one key, only one key can be activated at any one time. The default key is key 1. 8.3.3 WPA(2)-PSK Click Network > Wireless LAN to display the General screen. Select WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK from the Security Mode list. Figure 36 Network > Wireless LAN > General: WPA(2)-PSK NVG2053 Users Guide 101 Chapter 8 Wireless LAN The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 25 Network > Wireless LAN > General: WPA(2)-PSK LABEL Security Mode WPA Compatible DESCRIPTION Select WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK to enable data encryption. This field appears when you choose WPA-PSK2 as the Security Mode. Check this field to allow wireless devices using WPA-PSK security mode to connect to your NVG2053. The NVG2053 supports WPA-PSK and WPA2-PSK simultaneously. Pre-Shared Key WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK uses a simple common password for authentication. Group Key Update Timer Type a pre-shared key from 8 to 63 case-sensitive keyboard characters. The Group Key Update Timer is the rate at which the AP sends a new group key out to all clients. The default is 3600 seconds (60 minutes). 8.3.4 WPA(2) Authentication Use this screen to configure and enable WPA or WPA2 authentication; click the Wireless LAN link under Network to display the General screen. Select WPA or WPA2 from the Security Mode list. Figure 37 Wireless LAN > General: WPA(2) 102 NVG2053 Users Guide The following table describes the wireless LAN security labels in this screen. Chapter 8 Wireless LAN Table 26 Wireless LAN > General: WPA(2) LABEL Security Mode WPA Compatible DESCRIPTION Choose WPA or WPA2 from the drop-down list box. This field is only available for WPA2. Select this if you want the NVG2053 to support WPA and WPA2 simultaneously. The Group Key Update Timer is the rate at which the RADIUS server sends a new group key out to all clients. This field is available only when you select WPA2. Specify how often wireless clients have to resend usernames and passwords in order to stay connected. Enter a time interval between 10 and 999999 minutes. Note: If wireless client authentication is done using a RADIUS server, the reauthentication timer on the RADIUS server has priority. This field is available only when you select WPA2. Pre-authentication enables fast roaming by allowing the wireless client
(already connecting to an AP) to perform IEEE 802.1x authentication with another AP before connecting to it. Select Enabled to turn on preauthentication in WAP2. Otherwise, select Disabled. Group Key Update Timer PMK Cache Period Pre-
Authentication Authentication Server IP Address Port Number Enter the IP address of the external authentication server in dotted decimal notation. Enter the port number of the external authentication server. The default port number is 1812. You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so with additional information. Shared Secret Enter a password (up to 31 alphanumeric characters) as the key to be shared between the external authentication server and the NVG2053. Session Timeout The key must be the same on the external authentication server and your NVG2053. The key is not sent over the network. The NVG2053 automatically disconnects a wireless client from the wireless and wired networks after a period of inactivity. The wireless client needs to send the username and password again before it can use the wireless and wired networks again. Some wireless clients may prompt users for a username and password; other clients may use saved login credentials. In either case, there is usually a short delay while the wireless client logs in to the wireless network again. Enter the time in seconds from 0 to 999999. NVG2053 Users Guide 103 Chapter 8 Wireless LAN 8.4 MAC Filter The MAC filter screen allows you to configure the NVG2053 to give exclusive access to devices (Allow) or exclude devices from accessing the NVG2053
(Deny). Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. You need to know the MAC address of the devices to configure this screen. To change your NVG2053s MAC filter settings, click Network > Wireless LAN >
MAC Filter. The screen appears as shown. Figure 38 Network > Wireless LAN > MAC Filter 104 NVG2053 Users Guide Chapter 8 Wireless LAN The following table describes the labels in this menu. Table 27 Network > Wireless LAN > MAC Filter LABEL MAC Address Filter Filter Action Define the filter action for the list of MAC addresses in the MAC Filter DESCRIPTION Select to turn on (Enable) or off (Disable) MAC address filtering. Summary table. This field is configurable only when you select Enable in the MAC Address Filter field. Select Allow to permit access to the NVG2053, MAC addresses not listed will be denied access to the NVG2053. Select Deny to block access to the NVG2053, MAC addresses not listed will be allowed to access the NVG2053 This is the index number of the MAC address. Enter the MAC addresses of the wireless devices that are allowed or denied access to the NVG2053. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NVG2053. Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen. Set MAC Address Apply Cancel 8.5 Wireless LAN Advanced Screen Use this screen to allow wireless advanced features, such as intra-BSS networking and set the RTS/CTS Threshold Click Network > Wireless LAN > Advanced. The screen appears as shown. Figure 39 Network > Wireless LAN > Advanced NVG2053 Users Guide 105 Chapter 8 Wireless LAN The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 28 Network > Wireless LAN > Advanced LABEL RTS/CTS Threshold DESCRIPTION Data with its frame size larger than this value will perform the RTS
(Request To Send)/CTS (Clear To Send) handshake. Fragmentation Threshold Intra-BSS Traffic Enter a value between 256 and 2346. The threshold (number of bytes) for the fragmentation boundary for directed messages. It is the maximum data fragment size that can be sent. Enter an even number between 256 and 2346. A Basic Service Set (BSS) exists when all communications between wireless clients or between a wireless client and a wired network client go through one access point (AP). Output Power Intra-BSS traffic is traffic between wireless clients in the BSS. When Intra-BSS is enabled, wireless clients can access the wired network and communicate with each other. When Intra-BSS is disabled, wireless clients can still access the wired network but cannot communicate with each other. Set the output power of the NVG2053 in this field. If there is a high density of APs in an area, decrease the output power of the NVG2053 to reduce interference with other APs. Select one of the following 100%, 90%, 75%, 50% or 25%. See the product specifications for more information on your NVG2053s output power. HT (High Throughput) Physical Mode - Use the fields below to configure the 802.11 wireless environment of your NVG2053. Operating Mode Choose this according to the wireless mode(s) used in your network. Mixed - Select this if the wireless clients in your network use different wireless modes (for example, IEEE 802.11b/g and IEEE 802.1n modes) Channel Bandwidth Green - Select this if the wireless clients in your network uses only one type of wireless mode (for example, IEEEE 802.11 n only) Select the channel bandwidth you want to use for your wireless network. It is recommended that you select 20/40 (20/40 MHz). Select 20 MHz if you want to lessen radio interference with other wireless devices in your neighborhood. Guard Interval Select Auto to increase data throughput. However, this may make data transfer more prone to errors. Select Long to prioritize data integrity. This may be because your wireless network is busy and congested or the NVG2053 is located in an environment prone to radio interference. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NVG2053. Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen. Apply Cancel 106 NVG2053 Users Guide Chapter 8 Wireless LAN 8.6 Quality of Service (QoS) Screen The QoS screen allows you to automatically give a service (such as VoIP and video) a priority level. Click Network > Wireless LAN > QoS. The following screen appears. Figure 40 Network > Wireless LAN > QoS The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 29 Network > Wireless LAN > QoS LABEL WMM QoS DESCRIPTION Select Enable to have the NVG2053 automatically give a service a priority level according to the ToS value in the IP header of packets it sends. WMM QoS (Wifi MultiMedia Quality of Service) gives high priority to voice and video, which makes them run more smoothly. Click Apply to save your changes to the NVG2053. Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen. Apply Cancel 8.7 WPS Screen Use this screen to enable/disable WPS, view or generate a new PIN number and check current WPS status. To open this screen, click Network > Wireless LAN >
WPS tab. NVG2053 Users Guide 107 Chapter 8 Wireless LAN Note: WPS works only when you set the wireless security mode to WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK in the Wireless LAN > General screen. Figure 41 Network > Wireless LAN > WPS The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Table 30 Network > Wireless LAN > WPS LABEL WPS Setup WPS PIN Number Select Enable to turn on the WPS feature. Otherwise, select Disable. This displays a PIN number last time system generated. Click Generate to generate a new PIN number. WPS Status Status Release Configuration 802.11 Mode SSID Security Apply Cancel This displays Configured when the NVG2053 has connected to a wireless network using WPS or when Enable WPS is selected and wireless or wireless security settings have been changed. The current wireless and wireless security settings also appear in the screen. This displays Unconfigured if WPS is disabled and there are no wireless or wireless security changes on the NVG2053 or you click Release_Configuration to remove the configured wireless and wireless security settings. This button is only available when the WPS status displays Configured. Click this button to remove all configured wireless and wireless security settings for WPS connections on the NVG2053. This is the 802.11 mode used. Only compliant WLAN devices can associate with the NVG2053. This is the name of the wireless network. This is the type of wireless security employed by the network. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NVG2053. Click Cancel to get this screen information afresh. 108 NVG2053 Users Guide 8.8 WPS Station Screen Chapter 8 Wireless LAN Use this screen when you want to add a wireless station using WPS. To open this screen, click Network > Wireless LAN > WPS Station tab. Note: After you click Push Button on this screen, you have to press a similar button in the wireless station utility within 2 minutes. To add the second wireless station, you have to press these buttons on both device and the wireless station again after the first 2 minutes. Figure 42 Network > Wireless LAN > WPS Station The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 31 Network > Wireless LAN > WPS Station LABEL Push Button DESCRIPTION Use this button when you use the PBC (Push Button Configuration) method to add another WPS-enabled wireless device (within wireless range of the NVG2053) to your wireless network. See Section 8.10.3.1 on page 114. Click this to start WPS-aware wireless station scanning and the wireless security information synchronization. Note: You must press the other wireless devices WPS button within two minutes of pressing this button. Or input station's PIN number Use this button when you use the PIN Configuration method to configure wireless stations wireless settings. See Section 8.10.3.2 on page 115. Enter the PIN of the device that you are setting up a WPS connection with and click Start to authenticate and add the wireless device to your wireless network. You can find the PIN either on the outside of the device, or by checking the devices settings. Note: You must also activate WPS on that device within two minutes to have it present its PIN to the NVG2053. NVG2053 Users Guide 109 Chapter 8 Wireless LAN 8.9 Scheduling Screen Use this screen to set the times your wireless LAN is turned on and off. Wireless LAN scheduling is disabled by default. The wireless LAN can be scheduled to turn on or off on certain days and at certain times. To open this screen, click Network
> Wireless LAN > Scheduling tab. Figure 43 Network > Wireless LAN > Scheduling The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 32 Network > Wireless LAN > Scheduling LABEL Wireless LAN Scheduling Scheduling WLAN Status DESCRIPTION Select Enable to activate wireless LAN scheduling. Otherwise, select Disable. Select On or Off to specify whether the Wireless LAN is turned on or off. This field works in conjunction with the Day and Except for the following times fields. Select Everyday or the specific days to turn the Wireless LAN on or off. If you select Everyday you can not select any specific days. This field works in conjunction with the Except for the following times field. Select a begin time using the first set of hour and minute (min) drop down boxes and select an end time using the second set of hour and minute (min) drop down boxes. If you have chosen On earlier for the WLAN Status the Wireless LAN will turn on between the two times you enter in these fields. If you have chosen Off earlier for the WLAN Status the Wireless LAN will turn off between the two times you enter in these fields. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NVG2053. Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen. Day Except for the following times
(24-Hour Format) Apply Cancel 110 NVG2053 Users Guide Chapter 8 Wireless LAN 8.10 Technical Reference This section discusses wireless LANs in depth. For more information, see the appendix. 8.10.1 Additional Wireless Terms The following table describes some wireless network terms and acronyms used in the NVG2053s Web Configurator. Table 33 Additional Wireless Terms TERM RTS/CTS Threshold In a wireless network which covers a large area, wireless devices DESCRIPTION are sometimes not aware of each others presence. This may cause them to send information to the AP at the same time and result in information colliding and not getting through. By setting this value lower than the default value, the wireless devices must sometimes get permission to send information to the NVG2053. The lower the value, the more often the devices must get permission. If this value is greater than the fragmentation threshold value (see below), then wireless devices never have to get permission to send information to the NVG2053. A preamble affects the timing in your wireless network. There are two preamble modes: long and short. If a device uses a different preamble mode than the NVG2053 does, it cannot communicate with the NVG2053. The process of verifying whether a wireless device is allowed to use the wireless network. A small fragmentation threshold is recommended for busy networks, while a larger threshold provides faster performance if the network is not very busy. Preamble Authentication Fragmentation Threshold 8.10.2 Wireless Security Overview The following sections introduce different types of wireless security you can set up in the wireless network. 8.10.2.1 SSID Normally, the NVG2053 acts like a beacon and regularly broadcasts the SSID in the area. You can hide the SSID instead, in which case the NVG2053 does not broadcast the SSID. In addition, you should change the default SSID to something that is difficult to guess. NVG2053 Users Guide 111 Chapter 8 Wireless LAN This type of security is fairly weak, however, because there are ways for unauthorized wireless devices to get the SSID. In addition, unauthorized wireless devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network. 8.10.2.2 MAC Address Filter Every device that can use a wireless network has a unique identification number, called a MAC address.1 A MAC address is usually written using twelve hexadecimal characters2; for example, 00A0C5000002 or 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. To get the MAC address for each device in the wireless network, see the devices Users Guide or other documentation. You can use the MAC address filter to tell the NVG2053 which devices are allowed or not allowed to use the wireless network. If a device is allowed to use the wireless network, it still has to have the correct information (SSID, channel, and security). If a device is not allowed to use the wireless network, it does not matter if it has the correct information. This type of security does not protect the information that is sent in the wireless network. Furthermore, there are ways for unauthorized wireless devices to get the MAC address of an authorized device. Then, they can use that MAC address to use the wireless network. 8.10.2.3 User Authentication Authentication is the process of verifying whether a wireless device is allowed to use the wireless network. You can make every user log in to the wireless network before they can use it. However, every device in the wireless network has to support IEEE 802.1x to do this. For wireless networks, you can store the user names and passwords for each user in a RADIUS server. This is a server used in businesses more than in homes. If you do not have a RADIUS server, you cannot set up user names and passwords for your users. Unauthorized wireless devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network, even if they cannot use the wireless network. Furthermore, there are ways for unauthorized wireless users to get a valid user name and password. Then, they can use that user name and password to use the wireless network. 1. Some wireless devices, such as scanners, can detect wireless networks but cannot use wireless networks. These kinds of wireless devices might not have MAC addresses. 2. Hexadecimal characters are 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, A, B, C, D, E, and F. 112 NVG2053 Users Guide Chapter 8 Wireless LAN 8.10.2.4 Encryption Wireless networks can use encryption to protect the information that is sent in the wireless network. Encryption is like a secret code. If you do not know the secret code, you cannot understand the message. The types of encryption you can choose depend on the type of authentication.
(See Section 8.10.2.3 on page 112 for information about this.) Table 34 Types of Encryption for Each Type of Authentication Weakest NO AUTHENTICATION RADIUS SERVER No Security Static WEP WPA-PSK Stronges t WPA2-PSK WPA WPA2 For example, if the wireless network has a RADIUS server, you can choose WPA or WPA2. If users do not log in to the wireless network, you can choose no encryption, Static WEP, WPA-PSK, or WPA2-PSK. Usually, you should set up the strongest encryption that every device in the wireless network supports. For example, suppose you have a wireless network with the NVG2053 and you do not have a RADIUS server. Therefore, there is no authentication. Suppose the wireless network has two devices. Device A only supports WEP, and device B supports WEP and WPA. Therefore, you should set up Static WEP in the wireless network. Note: It is recommended that wireless networks use WPA-PSK, WPA, or stronger encryption. The other types of encryption are better than none at all, but it is still possible for unauthorized wireless devices to figure out the original information pretty quickly. When you select WPA2 or WPA2-PSK in your NVG2053, you can also select an option (WPA compatible) to support WPA as well. In this case, if some of the devices support WPA and some support WPA2, you should set up WPA2-PSK or WPA2 (depending on the type of wireless network login) and select the WPA compatible option in the NVG2053. Many types of encryption use a key to protect the information in the wireless network. The longer the key, the stronger the encryption. Every device in the wireless network must have the same key. NVG2053 Users Guide 113 Chapter 8 Wireless LAN 8.10.3 WiFi Protected Setup Your NVG2053 supports WiFi Protected Setup (WPS), which is an easy way to set up a secure wireless network. WPS is an industry standard specification, defined by the WiFi Alliance. WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security, without having to configure security settings manually. Each WPS connection works between two devices. Both devices must support WPS (check each devices documentation to make sure). Depending on the devices you have, you can either press a button (on the device itself, or in its configuration utility) or enter a PIN (a unique Personal Identification Number that allows one device to authenticate the other) in each of the two devices. When WPS is activated on a device, it has two minutes to find another device that also has WPS activated. Then, the two devices connect and set up a secure network by themselves. 8.10.3.1 Push Button Configuration WPS Push Button Configuration (PBC) is initiated by pressing a button on each WPS-enabled device, and allowing them to connect automatically. You do not need to enter any information. Not every WPS-enabled device has a physical WPS button. Some may have a WPS PBC button in their configuration utilities instead of or in addition to the physical button. Take the following steps to set up WPS using the button. 1 Ensure that the two devices you want to set up are within wireless range of one another. 2 3 Look for a WPS button on each device. If the device does not have one, log into its configuration utility and locate the button (see the devices Users Guide for how to do this - for the NVG2053, see Section 8.8 on page 109). Press the button on one of the devices (it doesnt matter which). For the NVG2053 you must press the WPS button for more than three seconds. 4 Within two minutes, press the button on the other device. The registrar sends the network name (SSID) and security key through an secure connection to the enrollee. If you need to make sure that WPS worked, check the list of associated wireless clients in the APs configuration utility. If you see the wireless client in the list, WPS was successful. 114 NVG2053 Users Guide 8.10.3.2 PIN Configuration Chapter 8 Wireless LAN Each WPS-enabled device has its own PIN (Personal Identification Number). This may either be static (it cannot be changed) or dynamic (in some devices you can generate a new PIN by clicking on a button in the configuration interface). Use the PIN method instead of the push-button configuration (PBC) method if you want to ensure that the connection is established between the devices you specify, not just the first two devices to activate WPS in range of each other. However, you need to log into the configuration interfaces of both devices to use the PIN method. When you use the PIN method, you must enter the PIN from one device (usually the wireless client) into the second device (usually the Access Point or wireless router). Then, when WPS is activated on the first device, it presents its PIN to the second device. If the PIN matches, one device sends the network and security information to the other, allowing it to join the network. Take the following steps to set up a WPS connection between an access point or wireless router (referred to here as the AP) and a client device using the PIN method. 1 Ensure WPS is enabled on both devices. 2 Access the WPS section of the APs configuration interface. See the devices Users Guide for how to do this. 3 Look for the clients WPS PIN; it will be displayed either on the device, or in the WPS section of the clients configuration interface (see the devices Users Guide for how to find the WPS PIN - for the NVG2053, see Section 8.7 on page 107). 4 Enter the clients PIN in the APs configuration interface. Note: If the client devices configuration interface has an area for entering another devices PIN, you can either enter the clients PIN in the AP, or enter the APs PIN in the client - it does not matter which. 5 Start WPS on both devices within two minutes. Note: Use the configuration utility to activate WPS, not the push-button on the device itself. 6 On a computer connected to the wireless client, try to connect to the Internet. If you can connect, WPS was successful. If you cannot connect, check the list of associated wireless clients in the APs configuration utility. If you see the wireless client in the list, WPS was successful. NVG2053 Users Guide 115 Chapter 8 Wireless LAN The following figure shows a WPS-enabled wireless client (installed in a notebook computer) connecting to the WPS-enabled AP via the PIN method. Figure 44 Example WPS Process: PIN Method ENROLLEE REGISTRAR WPS This devices WPS PIN: 123456 WPS Enter WPS PIN from other device:
WPS WPS START START WITHIN 2 MINUTES SECURE EAP TUNNEL SSID WPA(2)-PSK COMMUNICATION 8.10.3.3 How WPS Works When two WPS-enabled devices connect, each device must assume a specific role. One device acts as the registrar (the device that supplies network and security settings) and the other device acts as the enrollee (the device that receives network and security settings. The registrar creates a secure EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) tunnel and sends the network name (SSID) and the WPA-
PSK or WPA2-PSK pre-shared key to the enrollee. Whether WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK is used depends on the standards supported by the devices. If the registrar is already part of a network, it sends the existing information. If not, it generates the SSID and WPA(2)-PSK randomly. 116 NVG2053 Users Guide Chapter 8 Wireless LAN The following figure shows a WPS-enabled client (installed in a notebook computer) connecting to a WPS-enabled access point. Figure 45 How WPS works ACTIVATE WPS ACTIVATE WPS ENROLLEE WITHIN 2 MINUTES WPS HANDSHAKE SECURE TUNNEL SECURITY INFO COMMUNICATION REGISTRAR The roles of registrar and enrollee last only as long as the WPS setup process is active (two minutes). The next time you use WPS, a different device can be the registrar if necessary. The WPS connection process is like a handshake; only two devices participate in each WPS transaction. If you want to add more devices you should repeat the process with one of the existing networked devices and the new device. Note that the access point (AP) is not always the registrar, and the wireless client is not always the enrollee. All WPS-certified APs can be a registrar, and so can some WPS-enabled wireless clients. By default, a WPS devices is unconfigured. This means that it is not part of an existing network and can act as either enrollee or registrar (if it supports both functions). If the registrar is unconfigured, the security settings it transmits to the enrollee are randomly-generated. Once a WPS-enabled device has connected to another device using WPS, it becomes configured. A configured wireless client can still act as enrollee or registrar in subsequent WPS connections, but a configured access point can no longer act as enrollee. It will be the registrar in all subsequent WPS connections in which it is involved. If you want a configured AP to act as an enrollee, you must reset it to its factory defaults. NVG2053 Users Guide 117 Chapter 8 Wireless LAN 8.10.3.4 Example WPS Network Setup This section shows how security settings are distributed in an example WPS setup. The following figure shows an example network. In step 1, both AP1 and Client 1 are unconfigured. When WPS is activated on both, they perform the handshake. In this example, AP1 is the registrar, and Client 1 is the enrollee. The registrar randomly generates the security information to set up the network, since it is unconfigured and has no existing information. Figure 46 WPS: Example Network Step 1 ENROLLEE CLIENT 1 SECURITY INFO REGISTRAR AP1 In step 2, you add another wireless client to the network. You know that Client 1 supports registrar mode, but it is better to use AP1 for the WPS handshake with the new client since you must connect to the access point anyway in order to use the network. In this case, AP1 must be the registrar, since it is configured (it already has security information for the network). AP1 supplies the existing security information to Client 2. Figure 47 WPS: Example Network Step 2 REGISTRAR AP1 EXISTING CONNECTION O F Y I N R I T U C E S CLIENT 1 ENROLLEE CLIENT 2 In step 3, you add another access point (AP2) to your network. AP2 is out of range of AP1, so you cannot use AP1 for the WPS handshake with the new access 118 NVG2053 Users Guide Chapter 8 Wireless LAN point. However, you know that Client 2 supports the registrar function, so you use it to perform the WPS handshake instead. Figure 48 WPS: Example Network Step 3 CLIENT 1 REGISTRAR CLIENT 2 EXISTING CONNECTION N T I O C E N N O G C T I N X I S E SECURITY INFO AP1 ENROLLEE AP2 8.10.3.5 Limitations of WPS WPS has some limitations of which you should be aware. WPS works in Infrastructure networks only (where an AP and a wireless client communicate). It does not work in Ad-Hoc networks (where there is no AP). When you use WPS, it works between two devices only. You cannot enroll multiple devices simultaneously, you must enroll one after the other. For instance, if you have two enrollees and one registrar you must set up the first enrollee (by pressing the WPS button on the registrar and the first enrollee, for example), then check that it successfully enrolled, then set up the second device in the same way. WPS works only with other WPS-enabled devices. However, you can still add non-WPS devices to a network you already set up using WPS. WPS works by automatically issuing a randomly-generated WPA-PSK or WPA2-
PSK pre-shared key from the registrar device to the enrollee devices. Whether the network uses WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK depends on the device. You can check the configuration interface of the registrar device to discover the key the network is using (if the device supports this feature). Then, you can enter the key into the non-WPS device and join the network as normal (the non-WPS device must also support WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK). NVG2053 Users Guide 119 Chapter 8 Wireless LAN When you use the PBC method, there is a short period (from the moment you press the button on one device to the moment you press the button on the other device) when any WPS-enabled device could join the network. This is because the registrar has no way of identifying the correct enrollee, and cannot differentiate between your enrollee and a rogue device. This is a possible way for a hacker to gain access to a network. You can easily check to see if this has happened. WPS works between only two devices simultaneously, so if another device has enrolled your device will be unable to enroll, and will not have access to the network. If this happens, open the access points configuration interface and look at the list of associated clients (usually displayed by MAC address). It does not matter if the access point is the WPS registrar, the enrollee, or was not involved in the WPS handshake; a rogue device must still associate with the access point to gain access to the network. Check the MAC addresses of your wireless clients
(usually printed on a label on the bottom of the device). If there is an unknown MAC address you can remove it or reset the AP. 120 NVG2053 Users Guide CHAPTER 9 LAN 9.1 Overview This chapter describes how to configure LAN settings. A Local Area Network (LAN) is a shared communication system to which many computers are attached. A LAN is a computer network limited to the immediate area, usually the same building or floor of a building. Figure 49 LAN Example LAN WAN The LAN screens can help you manage IP addresses. 9.2 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the IP screen (Section 9.4 on page 123) to change the IP address for your NVG2053. Use the Advanced screen (Section 9.5 on page 124) to enable IP multicasting on the LAN. NVG2053 Users Guide 121 Chapter 9 LAN 9.3 What You Need To Know The actual physical connection determines whether the NVG2053 ports are LAN or WAN ports. There are two separate IP networks, one inside the LAN network and the other outside the WAN network as shown next. Figure 50 LAN and WAN IP Addresses LAN WAN The LAN parameters of the NVG2053 are preset in the factory with the following values:
IP address of 192.168.1.1 with subnet mask of 255.255.255.0 (24 bits) DHCP server enabled with 100 client IP addresses starting from 192.168.1.100. These parameters should work for the majority of installations. 9.3.1 Multicast IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways - Unicast (1 sender - 1 recipient) or Broadcast (1 sender - everybody on the network). Multicast delivers IP packets to a group of hosts on the network - not everybody and not just 1. Figure 51 Multicast Example B C A D Server 122 NVG2053 Users Guide Chapter 9 LAN In the multicast example above, systems A and D comprise one multicast group. In multicasting, the server only needs to send one data stream and this is delivered to systems A and D. IGMP (Internet Group Multicast Protocol) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership in a multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. The NVG2053 supports both IGMP version 1 (IGMP-v1) and IGMP version 2 (IGMP-
v2). At start up, the NVG2053 queries all directly connected networks to gather group membership. After that, the NVG2053 periodically updates this information. IP multicasting can be enabled/disabled on the NVG2053 LAN and/or WAN interfaces in the Web Configurator. 9.4 LAN IP Screen Use this screen to change the IP address for your NVG2053. Click Network >
LAN > IP. Figure 52 Network > LAN > IP The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 35 Network > LAN > IP LABEL IP Address IP Subnet Mask DESCRIPTION Type the IP address of your NVG2053 in dotted decimal notation. The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Select a subnet mask from the drop-down list. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NVG2053. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. Apply Cancel NVG2053 Users Guide 123 Chapter 9 LAN 9.5 LAN Advanced Screen Use this screen to edit the NVG2053s multicast setting. Click LAN > Advanced. Figure 53 Network > LAN > IP Alias The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 36 Network > LAN > IP Alias LABEL Multicast DESCRIPTION IGMP (Internet Group Multicast Protocol) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership in a multicast group. Select IGMPv1/v2 to enable multicasting. This applies to traffic routed from the WAN to the LAN. Select None to disable this feature. This may cause incoming traffic to be dropped or sent to all connected network devices. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NVG2053. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. Apply Cancel 124 NVG2053 Users Guide CHAPTER 10 DHCP Server 10.1 Overview DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, RFC 2131 and RFC 2132) allows individual clients to obtain TCP/IP configuration at start-up from a server. You can configure the NVG2053s LAN as a DHCP server or disable it. When configured as a server, the NVG2053 provides the TCP/IP configuration for the clients. If DHCP service is disabled, you must have another DHCP server on your LAN, or else the computer must be manually configured. 10.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the General (Section 10.3 on page 126) screen to enable the DHCP server. Use the Advanced (Section 10.4 on page 126) screen to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual computers based on their MAC Addresses. Use the Client List (Section 10.5 on page 128) screen to view current DHCP client information of all network clients using the NVG2053s DHCP server. 10.2 What You Need to Know 10.2.1 DHCP DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) allows clients to obtain TCP/IP configuration at start-up from a server. The NVG2053 has built-in DHCP server capability that assigns IP addresses and DNS servers to systems that support DHCP client capability. 10.2.2 IP Pool Setup The NVG2053 is pre-configured with a pool of 32 IP addresses starting from 192.168.1.33 to 192.168.1.64. This configuration leaves 31 IP addresses
(excluding the NVG2053 itself) in the lower range (192.168.1.2 to 192.168.1.32) NVG2053 Users Guide 125 Chapter 10 DHCP Server for other server computers, for instance, servers for mail, FTP, TFTP, web, etc., that you may have. 10.3 General Screen Use this screen to enable the DHCP server. Click Network > DHCP Server. The following screen displays. Figure 54 Network > DHCP Server > General The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 37 Network > DHCP Server > General LABEL DHCP Server DESCRIPTION Select Enable to turn on the DHCP server for LAN devices. The NVG2053 will act as a DHCP server and assign IP addresses and provide subnet mask, gateway, and DNS server information to the network. IP Pool Starting Address Pool Size Apply Cancel Otherwise, select Disable to not have the NVG2053 provide any DHCP services. This field specifies the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool for LAN. This field specifies the size, or count of the IP address pool for LAN. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NVG2053. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 10.4 Advanced Screen This screen allows you to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual computers based on their MAC addresses. You can also use this screen to configure the DNS server information that the NVG2053 sends to the DHCP clients. 126 NVG2053 Users Guide Chapter 10 DHCP Server To change your NVG2053s static DHCP settings, click Network > DHCP Server
> Advanced. The following screen displays. Figure 55 Network > DHCP Server > Advanced The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Table 38 Network > DHCP Server > Advanced LABEL Static DHCP Table
MAC Address IP Address DNS Server DNS Servers Assigned by DHCP Server This is the index number of the static IP table entry (row). Type the MAC address (with colons) of a computer on your LAN. Type the LAN IP address of a computer on your LAN. The NVG2053 passes a DNS (Domain Name System) server IP address (in the order you specify here) to the DHCP clients. The NVG2053 only passes this information to the LAN DHCP clients when you enable the DHCP Server on the NVG2053. When you set DHCP Server to Disable in the DHCP Server > General screen, DHCP service is disabled and you must have another DHCP sever on your LAN, or else the computers must have their DNS server addresses manually configured. NVG2053 Users Guide 127 Chapter 10 DHCP Server Table 38 Network > DHCP Server > Advanced LABEL First DNS Server DESCRIPTION Select From ISP if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server information (and the NVG2053's WAN IP address). Second DNS Server Third DNS Server Apply Cancel Select User-Defined if you have the IP address of a DNS server. Enter the DNS server's IP address in the field to the right. Select DNS Relay to have the NVG2053 act as a DNS proxy. The NVG2053's LAN IP address displays in the field to the right (read-
only). The NVG2053 tells the DHCP clients on the LAN that the NVG2053 itself is the DNS server. When a computer on the LAN sends a DNS query to the NVG2053, the NVG2053 forwards the query to the NVG2053's system DNS server (configured in the Network >
Broadband screen) and relays the response back to the computer. Select None if you do not want to configure DNS servers. If you do not configure a DNS server, you must know the IP address of a computer in order to access it. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NVG2053. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 10.5 Client List Screen Click Network > DHCP Server > Client List. Read-only information here relates to your DHCP status. The DHCP table shows current DHCP client information
(including IP Address, Host Name and MAC Address) of all network clients using the NVG2053s DHCP server. Figure 56 Network > DHCP Server > Client List The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 39 Network > DHCP Server > Client List LABEL
Status Host Name IP Address DESCRIPTION This is the index number of the host computer. This displays whether the client is connected to the NVG2053. This indicates the computer host name. This indicates the IP address assigned to this client computer. 128 NVG2053 Users Guide Chapter 10 DHCP Server Table 39 Network > DHCP Server > Client List (continued) LABEL MAC Address This field shows the MAC address of the client computer. DESCRIPTION Reserve Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address which uniquely identifies a device. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. Select the check box(es) in each entry to have the NVG2053 always assign the selected entry(ies)s IP address(es) to the corresponding MAC address(es) (and host name(s)). After you click Apply, the MAC address and IP address also display in the DHCP Server > Advanced screen (where you can edit them). NVG2053 Users Guide 129 Chapter 10 DHCP Server 130 NVG2053 Users Guide CHAPTER 11 Quality of Service (QoS) 11.1 Overview Quality of Service (QoS) refers to both a networks ability to deliver data with minimum delay, and the networking methods used to control the use of bandwidth. Without QoS, all traffic data is equally likely to be dropped when the network is congested. This can cause a reduction in network performance and make the network inadequate for time-critical application such as video-on-
demand. Configure QoS on the NVG2053 to group and prioritize application traffic and fine-
tune network performance. Setting up QoS involves these steps:
1 Configure classifiers to sort traffic into different flows. 2 Assign priority and define actions to be performed for a classified traffic flow. The NVG2053 assigns each packet a priority and then queues the packet accordingly. Packets assigned a high priority are processed more quickly than those with low priority if there is congestion, allowing time-sensitive applications to flow more smoothly. Time-sensitive applications include both those that require a low level of latency (delay) and a low level of jitter (variations in delay) such as Voice over IP (VoIP) or Internet gaming, and those for which jitter alone is a problem such as Internet radio or streaming video. This chapter contains information about configuring QoS and editing classifiers. 11.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the General (Section 11.2 on page 132) screen to enable or disable QoS, set the bandwidth, and allow the NVG2053 to automatically assign priority to upstream traffic according to the DSCP value. This screen also lets you add, edit or delete QoS classes. NVG2053 Users Guide 131 Chapter 11 Quality of Service (QoS) 11.2 The Quality of Service General Screen Click Configuration > Network > QoS to open the screen as shown next. Use this screen to enable or disable QoS, set the bandwidth, and select to have the NVG2053 automatically assign priority to upstream traffic according to the DSCP value in the packets. See Section 11.1 on page 131 for more information. You can also use this screen to add, edit or delete QoS classes. A class groups traffic into data flows according to specific criteria such as the source address, destination address, source port number, destination port number or incoming interface. For example, you can configure a class to select traffic from the same protocol port (such as Telnet) to form a flow. You can give different priorities to traffic that the NVG2053 forwards out through a WAN interface. Give high priority to voice and video to make them run more smoothly. Similarly, give low priority to many large file downloads so that they do not reduce the quality of other applications. Figure 57 QoS General 132 NVG2053 Users Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen. Chapter 11 Quality of Service (QoS) Table 40 QoS General LABEL QoS Upstream traffic priority will be automatically assigned by DESCRIPTION Select Enabled to turn on QoS to improve your network performance. Otherwise, select Disabled. These fields are ignored if upstream traffic matches a pre-configured QoS class. If you select ON and traffic does not match a a pre-configured QoS class, the NVG2053 assigns priority to unmatched traffic based on the DSCP value in the packets. See Section 11.3 on page 135 for more information. If you select OFF, traffic which does not match a class is mapped to the default queue with the lowest priority. Click this button to create a new QoS class. This field displays the index number of the class. This shows whether the class is enabled or not. This is the name of the classifier. Add new Class
Status Class Name From Interface This is the interface from which traffic of this class should come. Forward To This is the interface through which traffic that matches this class is forwarded out. This is the DSCP number added to traffic of this class. This is the priority level assigned to traffic of this class. Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the classifier. Click the Remove icon to delete an existing classifier. Note that subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NVG2053. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. DSCP Mark Priority Modify Apply Cancel NVG2053 Users Guide 133 Chapter 11 Quality of Service (QoS) 11.2.1 QoS Class Edit Click the Add new Class button or the Edit icon in the QoS > General screen to configure a classifier. Figure 58 QoS Class Configuration The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 41 QoS Class Configuration LABEL Class Configuration Class Name DESCRIPTION Select to enable or disable this class. Enter a descriptive name of up to 20 printable English keyboard characters, including spaces. Select a priority level (between 0 and 7) from the drop down list box.
"7" is the highest priority level and "0" is the lowest. NVG2053 Users Guide Priority 134 Chapter 11 Quality of Service (QoS) Table 41 QoS Class Configuration (continued) LABEL Criteria Configuration DESCRIPTION Use the following fields to configure the criteria for traffic classification. From Interface Select from which LAN, WLAN or FXS interface traffic of this class should come. Source Address Port Range MAC Destination IP Address Port Range Others DSCP Packet modification DSCP Mark Packet forwarding Forward to Interface Back Apply Cancel Select the check box and enter the source IP address in dotted decimal notation and select a source subnet mask. Select the check box and enter the port number(s) of the source. Select the check box and enter the source MAC address of the packet. Select the check box and enter the destination IP address in dotted decimal notation and select a source subnet mask. Select the check box and enter the port number(s) of the source. Select this option and specify a DSCP (DiffServ Code Point) number between 0 and 63 in the field provided. If you select Mark, enter a DSCP value with which the NVG2053 replaces the DSCP field in the packets. If you select Unchange, the NVG2053 keep the DSCP field in the packets. Select a WAN interface through which traffic of this class will be forwarded out. If you select Unchange, the NVG2053 forward traffic of this class according to the default routing table. Click Back to return to the previous screen without saving. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NVG2053. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 11.3 Technical Reference The following section contains additional technical information about the NVG2053 features described in this chapter. QoS versus Cos QoS is used to prioritize source-to-destination traffic flows. All packets in the same flow are given the same priority. CoS (class of service) is a way of managing traffic NVG2053 Users Guide 135 Chapter 11 Quality of Service (QoS) in a network by grouping similar types of traffic together and treating each type as a class. You can use CoS to give different priorities to different packet types. CoS technologies include IEEE 802.1p layer 2 tagging and DiffServ (Differentiated Services or DS). IEEE 802.1p tagging makes use of three bits in the packet header, while DiffServ is a new protocol and defines a new DS field, which replaces the eight-bit ToS (Type of Service) field in the IP header. IEEE 802.1Q Tag The IEEE 802.1Q standard defines an explicit VLAN tag in the MAC header to identify the VLAN membership of a frame across bridges. A VLAN tag includes the 12-bit VLAN ID and 3-bit user priority. The VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that devices need to process the frame across the network. IEEE 802.1p specifies the user priority field and defines up to eight separate traffic types. The following table describes the traffic types defined in the IEEE 802.1d standard (which incorporates the 802.1p). Table 42 IEEE 802.1p Priority Level and Traffic Type PRIORITY LEVEL Level 7 TRAFFIC TYPE Typically used for network control traffic such as router configuration messages. Typically used for voice traffic that is especially sensitive to jitter (jitter is the variations in delay). Typically used for video that consumes high bandwidth and is sensitive to jitter. Typically used for controlled load, latency-sensitive traffic such as SNA
(Systems Network Architecture) transactions. Typically used for excellent effort or better than best effort and would include important business traffic that can tolerate some delay. This is for spare bandwidth. This is typically used for non-critical background traffic such as bulk transfers that are allowed but that should not affect other applications and users. Typically used for best-effort traffic. Level 6 Level 5 Level 4 Level 3 Level 2 Level 1 Level 0 DiffServ QoS is used to prioritize source-to-destination traffic flows. All packets in the flow are given the same priority. You can use CoS (class of service) to give different priorities to different packet types. DiffServ (Differentiated Services) is a class of service (CoS) model that marks packets so that they receive specific per-hop treatment at DiffServ-compliant 136 NVG2053 Users Guide Chapter 11 Quality of Service (QoS) network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow. Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points (DSCPs) indicating the level of service desired. This allows the intermediary DiffServ-compliant network devices to handle the packets differently depending on the code points without the need to negotiate paths or remember state information for every flow. In addition, applications do not have to request a particular service or give advanced notice of where the traffic is going. DSCP and Per-Hop Behavior DiffServ defines a new Differentiated Services (DS) field to replace the Type of Service (TOS) field in the IP header. The DS field contains a 2-bit unused field and a 6-bit DSCP field which can define up to 64 service levels. The following figure illustrates the DS field. DSCP is backward compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so that non-DiffServ compliant, ToS-enabled network device will not conflict with the DSCP mapping. DSCP (6 bits) Unused (2 bits) The DSCP value determines the forwarding behavior, the PHB (Per-Hop Behavior), that each packet gets across the DiffServ network. Based on the marking rule, different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding. Resources can then be allocated according to the DSCP values and the configured policies. IP Precedence Similar to IEEE 802.1p prioritization at layer-2, you can use IP precedence to prioritize packets in a layer-3 network. IP precedence uses three bits of the eight-
bit ToS (Type of Service) field in the IP header. There are eight classes of services
(ranging from zero to seven) in IP precedence. Zero is the lowest priority level and seven is the highest. Automatic Priority Queue Assignment If you enable QoS on the NVG2053, the NVG2053 can automatically base on the IEEE 802.1p priority level, IP precedence and/or packet length to assign priority to traffic which does not match a class. The following table shows you the internal layer-2 and layer-3 QoS mapping on the NVG2053. On the NVG2053, traffic assigned to higher priority queues gets NVG2053 Users Guide 137 Chapter 11 Quality of Service (QoS) through faster while traffic in lower index queues is dropped if the network is congested. Table 43 Internal Layer2 and Layer3 QoS Mapping PRIORITY QUEUE 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 LAYER 2 IEEE 802.1P USER PRIORITY
(ETHERNET PRIORITY) 1 2 0 3 4 5 6 7 LAYER 3 TOS (IP PRECEDENCE) DSCP IP PACKET LENGTH (BYTE)
>1100 250~1100
<250 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 000000 000000 001110 001100 001010 001000 010110 010100 010010 010000 011110 011100 011010 011000 100110 100100 100010 100000 101110 101000 110000 111000 138 NVG2053 Users Guide CHAPTER 12 Network Address Translation
(NAT) 12.1 Overview NAT (Network Address Translation - NAT, RFC 1631) is the translation of the IP address of a host in a packet. For example, the source address of an outgoing packet, used within one network is changed to a different IP address known within another network. Each packet has two addresses a source address and a destination address. For outgoing packets, NAT maps private (local) IP addresses to globally unique ones required for communication with hosts on other networks. It replaces the original IP source address in each packet and then forwards it to the Internet. The NVG2053 keeps track of the original addresses and port numbers so incoming reply packets can have their original values restored. The following figure illustrates this. Figure 59 NAT Example 192.168.1.13 192.168.1.12 192.168.1.11 192.168.1.10 NAT Table LAN 192.168.1.10 192.168.1.11 192.168.1.12 192.168.1.13 192.168.1.10 Public IP WAN For more information on IP address translation, refer to RFC 1631, The IP Network Address Translator (NAT). NVG2053 Users Guide 139 Chapter 12 Network Address Translation (NAT) 12.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the General screen (Section 12.2 on page 140) to enable NAT and set the maximum NAT sessions. Use the Port Forwarding screen (Section 12.3 on page 140) to forward incoming service requests to the server(s) on your local network. 12.2 The General NAT Screen Use this screen to enable NAT. Click Network > NAT > General to open the following screen. Figure 60 Network > NAT > General The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Table 44 Network > NAT > General LABEL NAT Setup Network Address Translation
(NAT) Network Address Translation (NAT) allows the translation of an Internet protocol address used within one network (for example a private IP address used in a local network) to a different IP address known within another network (for example a public IP address used on the Internet). Max NAT Session Per User Apply Cancel Select to enable or disable NAT on the NVG2053. Specify the highest number of NAT sessions that the NVG2053 will permit a host to have at one time. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NVG2053. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 12.3 The NAT Port Forwarding Screen Use this screen to forward incoming service requests to the server(s) on your local network and set a default server. You may enter a single port number or a range of port numbers to be forwarded, and the local IP address of the desired server. The port number identifies a service; for example, web service is on port 80 and FTP on port 21. In some cases, such as for unknown services or where one server 140 NVG2053 Users Guide Chapter 12 Network Address Translation (NAT) can support more than one service (for example both FTP and web service), it might be better to specify a range of port numbers. In addition to the servers for specified services, NAT supports a default server. A service request that does not have a server explicitly designated for it is forwarded to the default server. If the default is not defined, the service request is simply discarded. Note: Many residential broadband ISP accounts do not allow you to run any server processes (such as a Web or FTP server) from your location. Your ISP may periodically check for servers and may suspend your account if it discovers any active services at your location. If you are unsure, refer to your ISP. Port forwarding allows you to define the local servers to which the incoming services will be forwarded. To change your NVG2053s port forwarding settings, click Network > NAT > Port Forwarding. The screen appears as shown. Note: If you do not assign a Default Server, the NVG2053 discards all packets received for ports that are not specified in this screen or remote management. Refer to Appendix F on page 319 for port numbers commonly used for particular services. Figure 61 Network > NAT > Port Forwarding The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 45 Network > NAT > Port Forwarding LABEL Default Server Setup Default Server DESCRIPTION In addition to the servers for specified services, NAT supports a default server. A default server receives packets from ports that are not specified in the Port Forwarding screen. If you do not assign a Default Server IP address, the NVG2053 discards all packets received for ports that are not specified in the Port Forwarding screen or remote management. NVG2053 Users Guide 141 Chapter 12 Network Address Translation (NAT) DESCRIPTION Click this button to open a screen where you can add a rule to the table below. Table 45 Network > NAT > Port Forwarding (continued) LABEL Add Port Forward Port Forwarding Summary
Status Name Port Server IP Address Modify This is the number of an individual port forwarding server entry. This icon is turned on when the rule is enabled. This field displays a name to identify this rule. This field displays the port number(s). This field displays the inside IP address of the server. Click the Edit icon to open a screen where you can modify an existing rule. Apply Cancel Click the Remove icon to delete a rule. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NVG2053. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 12.3.1 Port Forwarding Edit Screen This screen lets you create or edit a port forwarding rule. Click the Add Port Forward button or a rules Edit icon in the Port Forwarding screen to open the following screen. Figure 62 NAT > Port Forwarding Edit The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 46 NAT > Port Forwarding Edit LABEL Port Forwarding DESCRIPTION Select Enable to turn on this rule and the requested service can be forwarded to the host with a specified internal IP address. Service Name Select Disable to disallow forwarding of these ports to an inside server without having to delete the entry. Type a name (of up to 31 printable characters) to identify this rule in the first field next to Service Name. Otherwise, select a predefined service in the second field next to Service Name. The predefined service name and port number(s) will display in the Service Name and Port fields. 142 NVG2053 Users Guide Chapter 12 Network Address Translation (NAT) Table 46 NAT > Port Forwarding Edit (continued) LABEL Port DESCRIPTION Type a port number(s) to define the service to be forwarded to the specified server. To specify a range of ports, enter a hyphen (-) between the first port and the last port, such as 10-20. Type the IP address of the server on your LAN that receives packets from the port(s) specified in the Port field. Click Back to return to the previous screen. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NVG2053. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. Server IP Address Back Apply Cancel NVG2053 Users Guide 143 Chapter 12 Network Address Translation (NAT) 144 NVG2053 Users Guide CHAPTER 13 Dynamic DNS 13.1 Overview Dynamic DNS (DDNS) services let you use a domain name with a dynamic IP address. 13.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the Dynamic DNS screen (Section 13.3 on page 146) to enable DDNS and configure the DDNS settings on the NVG2053. 13.2 What You Need To Know Dynamic DNS allows you to update your current dynamic IP address with one or many dynamic DNS services so that anyone can contact you (in NetMeeting, CU-
SeeMe, etc.). You can also access your FTP server or Web site on your own computer using a domain name (for instance myhost.dhs.org, where myhost is a name of your choice) that will never change instead of using an IP address that changes each time you reconnect. Your friends or relatives will always be able to call you even if they don't know your IP address. NVG2053 Users Guide 145 Chapter 13 Dynamic DNS 13.3 The Dynamic DNS Screen To change your NVG2053s DDNS, click Network > DDNS. The screen appears as shown. Figure 63 Network > DDNS The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 47 Network > DDNS LABEL Enable DDNS Service Provider Domain Name User Name/Email Password/Key IP Address Update Policy DESCRIPTION Select this check box to use dynamic DNS. Select the name of your Dynamic DNS service provider. Type the domain name assigned to your NVG2053 by your Dynamic DNS provider. Enter the user name you used to register for this service. Enter the password you used to register for this service. Select Use WAN IP Address to have the NVG2053 update the domain name with the WAN interface's IP address. Select Auto-Detect only when there are one or more NAT routers between the NVG2053 and the DDNS server. This feature has the DDNS server automatically detect and use the IP address of the NAT router that has a public IP address. Note: The DDNS server may not be able to detect the proper IP address if there is an HTTP proxy server between the NVG2053 and the DDNS server. Select Use specified IP Address and enter the IP address if you have a static IP address. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NVG2053. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. NVG2053 Users Guide Apply Cancel 146 CHAPTER 14 Static Route 14.1 Overview The NVG2053 usually uses the default gateway to route outbound traffic from computers on the LAN to the Internet. To have the NVG2053 send data to devices not reachable through the default gateway, use static routes. For example, the next figure shows a computer (A) connected to the NVG2053s LAN interface. The NVG2053 routes most traffic from A to the Internet through the NVG2053s default gateway (R1). You create one static route to connect to services offered by your ISP behind router R2. You create another static route to communicate with a separate network behind a router R3 connected to the LAN. Figure 64 Example of Static Routing Topology A R3 LAN WAN R1 R2 14.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the Static Route screen (Section 14.2 on page 148) to view, add and delete static routes on the NVG2053. NVG2053 Users Guide 147 Chapter 14 Static Route 14.2 The IP Static Route Screen Click Network > Static Route to open the IP Static Route screen. Figure 65 Network > Static Route The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Click this to create a new rule. Table 48 Advanced > Static Route LABEL Add Static Route
Status Name Destination This is the number of an individual static route. This field indicates whether the rule is active or not. This field displays a name to identify this rule. This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination. Routing is always based on network number. This parameter specifies the IP network subnet mask of the final destination. This is the IP address of the gateway. The gateway is a router or switch on the same network segment as the device's LAN or WAN port. The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations. Click the Edit icon to open a screen where you can modify an existing rule. Click the Remove icon to delete a rule from the NVG2053. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NVG2053. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. Subent Mask Gateway Modify Apply Cancel 148 NVG2053 Users Guide Chapter 14 Static Route 14.2.1 Static Route Edit Click the Add Static Route button or a rules Edit icon in the Static Route screen. Use this screen to configure the required information for a static route. Figure 66 Static Route: Add The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 49 Static Route: Add LABEL Static Route Route Name DESCRIPTION Select to enable or disable this rule. Type a name to identify this rule. You can use up to 20 printable English keyboard characters, including spaces. This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination. Routing is always based on network number. If you need to specify a route to a single host, use a subnet mask of 255.255.255.255 in the subnet mask field to force the network number to be identical to the host ID. Select an IP subnet mask here. Enter the IP address of the next-hop gateway. The gateway is a router or switch on the same segment as your NVG2053's interface(s). The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations. Click Back to return to the previous screen without saving. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NVG2053. Click Cancel to set every field in this screen to its last-saved value. Destination IP Address IP Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address Back Apply Cancel NVG2053 Users Guide 149 Chapter 14 Static Route 150 NVG2053 Users Guide 15 CHAPTER Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) 15.1 Overview Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) is a distributed, open networking standard that uses TCP/IP for simple peer-to-peer network connectivity between devices. A UPnP device can dynamically join a network, obtain an IP address, convey its capabilities and learn about other devices on the network. In turn, a device can leave a network smoothly and automatically when it is no longer in use. 15.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the UPnP screen (Section 15.3 on page 152) to enable UPnP on the NVG2053. 15.2 What You Need to Know Identifying UPnP Devices UPnP hardware is identified as an icon in the Network Connections folder
(Windows XP). Each UPnP compatible device installed on your network will appear as a separate icon. Selecting the icon of a UPnP device will allow you to access the information and properties of that device. NAT Traversal UPnP NAT traversal automates the process of allowing an application to operate through NAT. UPnP network devices can automatically configure network addressing, announce their presence in the network to other UPnP devices and enable exchange of simple product and service descriptions. NAT traversal allows the following:
Dynamic port mapping Learning public IP addresses Assigning lease times to mappings NVG2053 Users Guide 151 Chapter 15 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) Windows Messenger is an example of an application that supports NAT traversal and UPnP. See the NAT chapter for more information on NAT. Cautions with UPnP The automated nature of NAT traversal applications in establishing their own services and opening firewall ports may present network security issues. Network information and configuration may also be obtained and modified by users in some network environments. When a UPnP device joins a network, it announces its presence with a multicast message. For security reasons, the NVG2053 allows multicast messages on the LAN only. All UPnP-enabled devices may communicate freely with each other without additional configuration. Disable UPnP if this is not your intention. UPnP and ZyXEL ZyXEL has achieved UPnP certification from the Universal Plug and Play Forum UPnP Implementers Corp. (UIC). ZyXEL's UPnP implementation supports Internet Gateway Device (IGD) 1.0. See the following sections for examples of installing and using UPnP. 15.3 The UPnP Screen Click Advanced > UPnP to display the screen shown next. See Section 15.1 on page 151 for more information. Figure 67 Advanced > UPnP 152 NVG2053 Users Guide Chapter 15 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 50 Advanced > UPnP LABEL UPnP DESCRIPTION Select Enabled to turn on UPnP. Be aware that anyone could use a UPnP application to open the web configurator's login screen without entering the NVG2053's IP address (although you must still enter the password to access the web configurator). Click Apply to save your changes back to the NVG2053. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. Apply Cancel 15.4 Installing UPnP in Windows This section shows you how to configure or install UPnP in Windows. 15.4.1 Windows 7 Windows 7 already has UPnP installed. To enable it:
1 Click Start > Control Panel and select Network and Internet. 2 Click Network and Sharing Center. 3 In the Network and Sharing window, set Network Discovery to On. This activates the UPnP feature in Windows 7 NVG2053 Users Guide 153 Chapter 15 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) 15.4.2 Windows XP To install the UPnP in Windows XP:
1 Click Start and Control Panel. 2 Double-click Network Connections. 3 4 In the Network Connections window, click Advanced in the main menu and select Optional Networking Components . Network Connections The Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard window displays. Select Networking Service in the Components selection box and click Details. Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard 154 NVG2053 Users Guide Chapter 15 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) 5 In the Networking Services window, select the Universal Plug and Play check box. Networking Services 6 Click OK to go back to the Windows Optional Networking Component Wizard window and click Next. 15.5 Using UPnP in Windows XP This section shows you how to use the UPnP feature in Windows XP. You must already have UPnP installed in Windows XP and UPnP activated on the NVG2053. Make sure the computer is connected to a LAN port of the NVG2053. Turn on your computer and the NVG2053. NVG2053 Users Guide 155 Chapter 15 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) 15.5.1 Auto-discover Your UPnP-enabled Network Device 1 Click Start and Control Panel. Double-click Network Connections. An icon displays under Internet Gateway. 2 Right-click the icon and select Properties. Network Connections 3 In the Internet Connection Properties window, click Settings to see the port mappings there were automatically created. Internet Connection Properties 156 NVG2053 Users Guide Chapter 15 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) 4 You may edit or delete the port mappings or click Add to manually add port mappings. Internet Connection Properties: Advanced Settings Internet Connection Properties: Advanced Settings: Add 5 When the UPnP-enabled device is disconnected from your computer, all port mappings will be deleted automatically. 6 Select Show icon in notification area when connected option and click OK. An icon displays in the system tray. System Tray Icon NVG2053 Users Guide 157 Chapter 15 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) 7 Double-click on the icon to display your current Internet connection status. Internet Connection Status 15.5.2 Web Configurator Easy Access With UPnP, you can access the web-based configurator on the NVG2053 without finding out the IP address of the NVG2053 first. This comes helpful if you do not know the IP address of the NVG2053. Follow the steps below to access the web configurator. 1 Click Start and then Control Panel. 2 Double-click Network Connections. 158 NVG2053 Users Guide Chapter 15 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) 3 Select My Network Places under Other Places. Network Connections 4 An icon with the description for each UPnP-enabled device displays under Local Network. 5 Right-click on the icon for your NVG2053 and select Invoke. The web configurator login screen displays. Network Connections: My Network Places NVG2053 Users Guide 159 Chapter 15 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) 6 Right-click on the icon for your NVG2053 and select Properties. A properties window displays with basic information about the NVG2053. Network Connections: My Network Places: Properties: Example EXAMPLE EXAMPLE 160 NVG2053 Users Guide CHAPTER 16 Firewall 16.1 Overview This chapter shows you how to enable and configure the NVG2053 firewall settings. The NVG2053 firewall is a packet filtering firewall and restricts access based on the source/destination computer network address of a packet and the type of application. 16.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the General (Section 16.3 on page 162) screen to enable or disable the NVG2053s firewall. Use the Services (Section 16.4 on page 163) screen to view the configured firewall rules and add, edit or remove a firewall rule. 16.2 What You Need To Know Basics Computers share information over the Internet using a common language called TCP/IP. TCP/IP, in turn, is a set of application protocols that perform specific functions. An extension number, called the "TCP port" or "UDP port" identifies these protocols, such as HTTP (Web), FTP (File Transfer Protocol), POP3 (E-mail), etc. For example, Web traffic by default uses TCP port 80. When computers communicate on the Internet, they are using the client/server model, where the server "listens" on a specific TCP/UDP port for information requests from remote client computers on the network. For example, a Web server typically listens on port 80. Please note that while a computer may be intended for use over a single port, such as Web on port 80, other ports are also active. If the person configuring or managing the computer is not careful, a hacker could attack it over an unprotected port. NVG2053 Users Guide 161 Chapter 16 Firewall Some of the most common IP ports are:
Table 51 Common IP Ports 21 23 25 FTP Telnet SMTP 53 80 110 DNS HTTP POP3 Default Filtering Policies Filtering rules are grouped based on the direction of travel of packets to which they apply. The default rule for incoming traffic blocks all incoming connections from the WAN to the LAN. If you wish to allow certain WAN users to have access to your LAN, you will need to create custom rules to allow it. Note: If you configure filtering rules without a good understanding of how they work, you might inadvertently introduce security risks to the firewall and to the protected network. Make sure you test your rules after you configure them. These custom rules work by comparing the Source IP address, Destination IP address and IP protocol type of network traffic to rules set by the administrator. Your customized rules take precedence and override the NVG2053s default rules. 16.3 The General Firewall Screen Use this screen to enable or disable the NVG2053s firewall. Click Configuration
> Security > Firewall to open the General screen. Figure 68 Security > Firewall > General 162 NVG2053 Users Guide Chapter 16 Firewall The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 52 Security > Firewall > General LABEL Firewall Setup DESCRIPTION Select Enable to activate the firewall. When the firewall is enabled, the NVG2053 blocks all incoming traffic from the WAN to the LAN. Create custome rules to allow certain WAN users to access your LAN or to allow traffic from the WAN to a certain computer on the LAN. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NVG2053. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. Apply Cancel 16.4 The Services Screen Note: The ordering of your rules is very important as rules are applied in turn. Click Security > Firewall > Services to bring up the following screen. This screen displays a list of the configured firewall rules. Note the order in which the rules are listed. Click Security > Firewall > Services. The screen appears as shown next. Figure 69 Security > Firewall > Services The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 53 Security > Firewall > Services LABEL Firewall Rule
DESCRIPTION Status Service Name Protocol This is your firewall rule number. The ordering of your rules is important as rules are applied in turn. This field displays whether a firewall rule is turned on or not. This is a name that identifies or describes the firewall rule. This is the protocol (TCP, UDP, ICMP or None) used to transport the packets for which you want to apply the firewall rule. NVG2053 Users Guide 163 Chapter 16 Firewall Table 53 Security > Firewall > Services LABEL Source IP DESCRIPTION This is the IP address of the computer from which traffic for the application or service is initialized. This is the IP address of the computer to which traffic for the application or service is entering. This is the port number/range of the source and destination that define the traffic type, for example TCP port 80 defines web traffic. Click the Edit icon to open a screen where you can modify an existing rule. Click the Remove icon to delete a rule from the NVG2053. Enter an index number and click Add to add a new firewall rule before the specified index number. For example, if you enter 6, your new rule becomes number 6 and the previous rule 6 (if there is one) becomes rule 7. Type a number in the first field next to the Move button and click the Move button to move the rule to the number that you typed in the second field next to the Move button. The ordering of your rules is important as they are applied in order of their numbering. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NVG2053. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. Destination IP Port Information Modify Add Move Apply Cancel 16.4.1 Configuring Firewall Rules In the Firewall > Services screen, enter an index number and click Add or click a rules Edit icon to display this screen and refer to the following table for information on the labels. Figure 70 Security > Firewall > Services > Add 164 NVG2053 Users Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen. Chapter 16 Firewall DESCRIPTION Table 54 Security > Firewall > Services > Add LABEL Firewall Edit Rule Firewall Rule Add Firewall Rule Service Name Source MAC Address Dest IP Address Enter the IP address of the computer to which traffic for the application Enter a name that identifies or describes the firewall rule. Enter the MAC address of the computer for which the firewall rule applies. Select Enable to activate the firewall rule. or service is entering. The NVG2053 applies the firewall rule to traffic initiating from this computer. Enter the IP address of the computer that initializes traffic for the application or service. The NVG2053 applies the firewall rule to traffic initiating from this computer. Select the protocol (TCP, UDP, ICMP or None) used to transport the packets for which you want to apply the firewall rule. Source IP Address Protocol DestPort Range Enter the port number/range of the destination that define the traffic SourcePort Range Back Apply Cancel type, for example TCP port 80 defines web traffic. Enter the port number/range of the source that define the traffic type, for example TCP port 80 defines web traffic. Click Back to return to the previous screen without saving. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NVG2053. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. See Appendix F on page 319 for commonly used services and port numbers. NVG2053 Users Guide 165 Chapter 16 Firewall 166 NVG2053 Users Guide CHAPTER 17 Voice 17.1 Overview Use this chapter to:
Connect an analog phone to the NVG2053. Make phone calls over the Internet, as well as the regular phone network. Configure settings such as speed dial. Configure network settings to optimize the voice quality of your phone calls. 17.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter These screens allow you to configure your NVG2053 to make phone calls over the Internet and your regular phone line, and to set up the phones you connect to the NVG2053. Use the SIP Service Provider screen (Section 17.3 on page 169) to configure the SIP server information, QoS for VoIP calls, outbound proxy server, dialing interval and timer settings. Use the SIP Account screen (Section 17.4 on page 172) to set up information about your SIP account, configure dialing plan rules and enable certain phone functions. Use the Phone Device screen (Section 17.4 on page 172) to control which SIP accounts the phones connected to the NVG2053 use and configure audio settings such as volume levels for the phones connected to the NVG2053. Use the Region screen (Section 17.6 on page 180) to change settings that depend on the country you are in. Use the Speed Dial screen (Section 17.7 on page 180) to set up shortcuts for dialing frequently-used (VoIP) phone numbers. Use the PSTN Call Through screen (Section 17.8 on page 182) to configure your regular phone line. You dont necessarily need to use all these screens to set up your account. In fact, if your service provider did not supply information on a particular field in a screen, it is usually best to leave it at its default setting. NVG2053 Users Guide 167 Chapter 17 Voice 17.1.2 What You Need to Know VoIP VoIP stands for Voice over IP. IP is the Internet Protocol, which is the message-
carrying standard the Internet runs on. So, Voice over IP is the sending of voice signals (speech) over the Internet (or another network that uses the Internet Protocol). SIP SIP stands for Session Initiation Protocol. SIP is a signalling standard that lets one network device (like a computer or the NVG2053) send messages to another. In VoIP, these messages are about phone calls over the network. For example, when you dial a number on your NVG2053, it sends a SIP message over the network asking the other device (the number you dialed) to take part in the call. SIP Accounts A SIP account is a type of VoIP account. It is an arrangement with a service provider that lets you make phone calls over the Internet. When you set the NVG2053 to use your SIP account to make calls, the NVG2053 is able to send all the information about the phone call to your service provider on the Internet. Strictly speaking, you dont need a SIP account. It is possible for one SIP device
(like the NVG2053) to call another without involving a SIP service provider. However, the networking difficulties involved in doing this make it tremendously impractical under normal circumstances. Your SIP account provider removes these difficulties by taking care of the call routing and setup - figuring out how to get your call to the right place in a way that you and the other person can talk to one another. How to Find Out More See Chapter 2 on page 27 for a tutorial showing how to set up these screens in an example scenario. See Section 17.9 on page 183 for advanced technical information on SIP. 17.2 Before You Begin Before you can use these screens, you need to have a VoIP account already set up. If you dont have one yet, you can sign up with a VoIP service provider over the Internet. 168 NVG2053 Users Guide You should have the information your VoIP service provider gave you ready, before you start to configure the NVG2053. Chapter 17 Voice 17.3 The SIP Service Provider Screen Click VoIP > SIP > SIP Service Provider to open the SIP Service Provider screen. Use this screen to configure the SIP server information, QoS for VoIP calls. Figure 71 VoIP > SIP > SIP Service Provider NVG2053 Users Guide 169 Chapter 17 Voice Each field is described in the following table. DESCRIPTION Table 55 VoIP > SIP > SIP Service Provider LABEL Service Provider Selection SIP Service Provider SIP Service Provider Name General SIP Local Port Select the SIP service provider profile you want to see in this screen. If you change this field, the screen automatically refreshes. Enter a descriptive name of up to 63 printable ASCII characters for this SIP service provider profile. Spaces are not allowed. Enter the NVG2053s listening port number, if your VoIP service provider gave you one. Otherwise, keep the default value. Enter the IP address or domain name of the SIP server provided by your VoIP service provider. You can use up to 95 printable ASCII characters. It does not matter whether the SIP server is a proxy, redirect or register server. Enter the SIP servers listening port number, if your VoIP service provider gave you one. Otherwise, keep the default value. Enter the IP address or domain name of the SIP register server, if your VoIP service provider gave you one. Otherwise, enter the same address you entered in the SIP Server Address field. You can use up to 95 printable ASCII characters. Enter the SIP register servers listening port number, if your VoIP service provider gave you one. Otherwise, enter the same port number you entered in the SIP Server Port field. Enter the SIP service domain name. In the full SIP URI, this is the part after the @ symbol. You can use up to 127 printable ASCII Extended set characters. Click more... to display and edit more information for the SIP service provider profile. Click hide more to display and configure the basic settings only. Enter the listening port number(s) for RTP traffic, if your VoIP service provider gave you this information. Otherwise, keep the default values. To enter one port number, enter the port number in the Start Port and End Port fields. To enter a range of ports, enter the port number at the beginning of the range in the Start Port field. enter the port number at the end of the range in the End Port field. SIP Server Address SIP Server Port REGISTER Server Address REGISTER Server Port SIP Service Domain more.../hide more RTP Port Range Start Port End Port DTMF Mode 170 NVG2053 Users Guide Chapter 17 Voice Table 55 VoIP > SIP > SIP Service Provider (continued) LABEL DTMF Mode DESCRIPTION Control how the NVG2053 handles the tones that your telephone makes when you push its buttons. You should use the same mode your VoIP service provider uses. RFC2833 - send the DTMF tones in RTP packets. PCM - send the DTMF tones in the voice data stream. This method works best when you are using a codec that does not use compression
(like G.711). Codecs that use compression (like G.729 and G.726) can distort the tones. SIP INFO - send the DTMF tones in SIP messages. This field controls how the NVG2053 handles fax messages. Select this if the NVG2053 should use G.711 to send fax messages. The peer devices must also use G.711. Select this if the NVG2053 should send fax messages as UDP packets through IP networks. This provides better quality, but it may have inter-
operability problems. The peer devices must also use T.38. Select this option if your VoIP service provider has a SIP outbound server to handle voice calls. This allows the NVG2053 to work with any type of NAT router and eliminates the need for STUN or a SIP ALG. Turn off any SIP ALG on a NAT router in front of the NVG2053 to keep it from re-translating the IP address (since this is already handled by the outbound proxy server). Enter the IP address or domain name of the SIP outbound proxy server. Enter the SIP outbound proxy servers listening port, if your VoIP service provider gave you one. Otherwise, keep the default value. Enter the priority for SIP voice transmissions. The NVG2053 creates Type of Service priority tags with this priority to voice traffic that it transmits. Enter the priority for RTP voice transmissions. The NVG2053 creates Type of Service priority tags with this priority to RTP traffic that it transmits. FAX Option G.711 Fax Passthrough T.38 Fax Relay Outbound Proxy Enable Server Address Server Port QoS Tag SIP TOS Priority Setting RTP TOS Priority Setting Timer Setting Expiration Duration Enter the number of seconds your SIP account is registered with the SIP register server before it is deleted. The NVG2053 automatically tries to re-register your SIP account when one-half of this time has passed.
(The SIP register server might have a different expiration.) Enter the number of seconds the NVG2053 waits before it tries again to register the SIP account, if the first try failed or if there is no response. Register Re-
send timer Session Expires Enter the number of seconds the NVG2053 lets a SIP session remain idle (without traffic) before it automatically disconnects the session. NVG2053 Users Guide 171 Chapter 17 Voice Table 55 VoIP > SIP > SIP Service Provider (continued) LABEL Min-SE DESCRIPTION Enter the minimum number of seconds the NVG2053 lets a SIP session remain idle (without traffic) before it automatically disconnects the session. When two SIP devices start a SIP session, they must agree on an expiration time for idle sessions. This field is the shortest expiration time that the NVG2053 accepts. Dialing Interval Selection Dialing Interval Selection Apply Cancel Select the number of seconds the NVG2053 should wait after you stop dialing numbers before it makes the phone call. The value depends on how quickly you dial phone numbers. Click this to save your changes and to apply them to the NVG2053. Click this to set every field in this screen to its last-saved value. 17.4 The SIP Account Screen The NVG2053 uses a SIP account to make outgoing VoIP calls and check if an incoming calls destination number matches your SIP accounts SIP number. In order to make or receive a VoIP call, you need to enable and configure a SIP account, and map it to a phone port. The SIP account contains information that allows your NVG2053 to connect to your VoIP service provider. Use this screen to maintain information about each SIP account. You can also enable and disable each SIP account. To access this screen, click VoIP > SIP >
SIP Account. Figure 72 VoIP > SIP > SIP Account The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 56 VoIP > SIP > SIP Account LABEL Add new account
DESCRIPTION Click this to create a new SIP account. This is the number of an individual account. 172 NVG2053 Users Guide Chapter 17 Voice Table 56 VoIP > SIP > SIP Account (continued) LABEL Active SIP Account Service Provider Account No. Modify DESCRIPTION This field indicates whether the rule is active or not. This field displays a name to identify this account. This field displays the name of the service provider profile used for this account. This field displays the SIP number of this account. Click the Edit icon to open a screen where you can modify an existing account. Apply Cancel Click the Delete icon to remove an account from the NVG2053. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NVG2053. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 17.4.1 SIP Account Edit Click the Add new account button or an entrys Edit icon in the SIP Account screen. Use this screen to configure the required information for a SIP account. Figure 73 VoIP > SIP > SIP Account: Add NVG2053 Users Guide 173 Chapter 17 Voice Each field is described in the following table. DESCRIPTION Table 57 VoIP > SIP > SIP Account: Add LABEL SIP Account Selection SIP Account Selection SIP Service Provider Association SIP Account Associated with General SIP Account Select the SIP account you want to see in this screen. If you change this field, the screen automatically refreshes. Select the SIP service provider profile you want to use for the SIP account you configure in this screen. Select Enabled if you want the NVG2053 to use this account. Select Disabled if you do not want the NVG2053 to use this account. Enter your SIP number. In the full SIP URI, this is the part before the @
symbol. You can use up to 127 printable ASCII characters. Enter the user name for registering this SIP account, exactly as it was given to you. You can use up to 95 printable ASCII characters. Enter the user name for registering this SIP account, exactly as it was given to you. You can use up to 95 printable ASCII Extended set characters. Click more... to display and edit more information for the SIP account. Click hide more to display and configure the basic SIP account settings only. Specify the dial plan rules in the text box provided. See Section 17.4.2 on page 176 for how to set up a rule. SIP Account Number Authentication User Name Password more.../hide more Dial Plan Dial Plan Voice Features 174 NVG2053 Users Guide Chapter 17 Voice Table 57 VoIP > SIP > SIP Account: Add (continued) LABEL Primary Compression Type DESCRIPTION Select the type of voice coder/decoder (codec) that you want the NVG2053 to use. Secondary Compression Type Third Compression Type G.711 provides high voice quality but requires more bandwidth (64 kbps). G.711 is the default codec used by phone companies and digital handsets. G.711a is typically used in Europe. G.711u is typically used in North America and Japan. G.722 is a 7 KHz wideband voice codec that operates at 48, 56 and 64 kbps. By using a sample rate of 16 kHz, G.722 can provide higher fidelity and better audio quality than narrowband codecs like G.711, in which the voice signal is sampled at 8 KHz. G.723.1 is an ITU (International Telecommunication Union) standard for voice coding. The G.723.1 codec compresses voice audio in 30 ms frames. The G.723.1 operates at two bitrates: 6.3 kbps when sampling at 24 bytes or 5.3 kbps when sampling at 20 bytes per 30 ms frame. G.726 is an Adaptive Differential Pulse Code Modulation (ADPCM) waveform codec that uses a lower bitrate than standard PCM conversion. Differential (or Delta) PCM is similar to PCM, but encodes the audio signal based on the difference between one sample and a prediction based on previous samples, rather than encoding the samples actual quantized value. G.726 operates at 16, 24, 32 or 40 kbps. G.729 is an Analysis-by-Synthesis (AbS) hybrid waveform codec. It uses a filter based on information about how the human vocal tract produces sounds. G.729 provides good sound quality and reduces the required bandwidth to 8kbps. The NVG2053 must use the same codec as the peer. When two SIP devices start a SIP session, they must agree on a codec. Select the NVG2053s first choice for voice coder/decoder. Select the NVG2053s second choice for voice coder/decoder. Select None if you only want the NVG2053 to accept the first choice. Select the NVG2053s third choice for voice coder/decoder. Select None if you only want the NVG2053 to accept the first or second choice. Call Features Send Caller ID Select this if you want to send identification when you make VoIP phone Enable Call Transfer Enable Call Waiting Call Waiting Reject Timer calls. Clear this if you do not want to send identification. Select this to enable call transfer on the NVG2053. This allows you to transfer an incoming call (that you have answered) to another phone. Select this to enable call waiting on the NVG2053. This allows you to place a call on hold while you answer another incoming call on the same telephone number. Specify a time of seconds that the NVG2053 waits before rejecting the second call if you do not answer it. NVG2053 Users Guide 175 Chapter 17 Voice Table 57 VoIP > SIP > SIP Account: Add (continued) LABEL Enable MWI DESCRIPTION Select this if you want to hear a waiting (beeping) dial tone on your phone when you have at least one voice message. Your VoIP service provider must support this feature. Enter the number of seconds the SIP server should provide the message waiting service each time the NVG2053 subscribes to the service. Before this time passes, the NVG2053 automatically subscribes again. Select this if you want the NVG2053 to forward all incoming calls to the specified phone number. Specify the phone number in the To Number field on the right. Select this if you want the NVG2053 to forward incoming calls to the specified phone number if the phone port is busy. Specify the phone number in the To Number field on the right. If you have call waiting, the incoming call is forwarded to the specified phone number if you reject or ignore the second incoming call. Select this if you want the NVG2053 to forward incoming calls to the specified phone number if the call is unanswered. (See No Answer Ring Count.) Specify the phone number in the To Number field on the right. This field is used by the Active No Answer Forward feature. Enter the number of telephone rings the NVG2053 should wait for you to answer an incoming call before it considers the call is unanswered. Select this to set your phone to not ring when someone calls you. Click Back to return to the previous screen without saving. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NVG2053. Click Cancel to set every field in this screen to its last-saved value. MWI Expired Enable Unconditional Forward Enable Busy Forward Enable No Answer Forward No Answer Ring Count Enable Do Not Disturb Back Apply Cancel 17.4.2 Dial Plan Rules A dial plan defines the dialing patterns, such as the length and range of the digits for a telephone number. It also includes country codes, access codes, area codes, local numbers, long distance numbers or international call prefixes. For example, the dial plan ([2-9]xxxxxx) does not allow a local number which begins with 1 or 0. Without a dial plan, users have to manually enter the whole callees number and wait for the specified dialing interval to time out or press a terminator key (usually the pound key on the phone keypad) before the NVG2053 makes the call. The NVG2053 initializes a call when the dialed number matches any one of the rules in the dial plan. Dial plan rules follow these conventions:
The collection of rules is in parentheses (). 176 NVG2053 Users Guide Chapter 17 Voice Rules are separated by the | (bar) symbol. x stands for a wildcard and can be any digit from 0 to 9. A subset of keys is in a square bracket []. Ranges are allowed. For example, [359] means a number matching this rule can be 3, 5 or 9. [26-
8*] means a number matching this rule can be 2, 6, 7, 8 or *. The dot . appended to a digit allows the digit to be ignored or repeated multiple times. Any digit (0~9, *, #) after the dot will be ignored. For example, (01.) means a number matching this rule can be 0, 01, 0111, 01111, and so on.
<dialed-number:translated-number> indicates the number after the colon replaces the number before the colon in an angle bracket <>. For example,
(<:1212> xxxxxxx) means the NVG2053 automatically prefixes the translated-
number 1212 to the number you dialed before making the call. This can be used for local calls in the US.
(<9:> xxx xxxxxxx) means the NVG2053 automatically removes the specified prefix 9 from the number you dialed before making the call. This is always used for making outside calls from an office.
(xx<123:456>xxxx) means the NVG2053 automatically translates 123 to 456 in the number you dialed before making the call. Calls with a number followed by the exclamation mark ! will be dropped. Calls with a number followed by the termination character @ will be made immediately. Any digit (0~9, *, #) after the @ character will be ignored. In this example dial plan (0 | [49]11 | 1 [2-9]xx xxxxxxx | 1 947 xxxxxxx !), you can dial 0 to call the local operator, call 411 or 911, or make a long distance call with an area code starting from 2 to 9 in the US. The calls with the area code 947 will be dropped. 17.5 The Phone Device Screen Use this screen to view and control which SIP accounts each phone uses. To access this screen, click VoIP > Phone > Phone Device. Figure 74 VoIP > Phone > Phone Device NVG2053 Users Guide 177 Chapter 17 Voice Each field is described in the following table. Table 58 VoIP > Phone > Phone Device LABEL Phone ID Outgoing SIP Number Modify DESCRIPTION This is the phone port in the NVG2053. This field displays the SIP account you want to use when making outgoing calls with the analog phone connected to this phone port. Click the Edit icon to open a screen where you can change the phone port settings. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NVG2053. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. Apply Cancel 17.5.1 The Phone Device Edit Screen Use this screen to select which SIP account to use for making or receiving phone calls on each individual phone port of the NVG2053. You can also configure the echo cancellation and VAD (Voice Activity Detection) settings. Click a phone ports Edit icon in the Phone Device screen. Figure 75 VoIP > Phone > Phone Device: Edit 178 NVG2053 Users Guide Each field is described in the following table. Chapter 17 Voice DESCRIPTION Table 59 VoIP > Phone > Phone Device: Edit LABEL SIP Account to Make Outgoing Call SIP Account Select the SIP account you want to use when making outgoing calls with the analog phone connected to this phone port. This field displays the SIP number of the account. Select the SIP account(s) for which you want to receive phone calls on this phone port. If you select more than one source for incoming calls, there is no way to distinguish between them when you receive phone calls. If you do not select a source for incoming calls, you cannot receive any calls on this phone port. This field displays the SIP number of the account. Enter the loudness that the NVG2053 uses for speech that it sends to the peer device. SIP Number SIP Account(s) to Receive Incomming Call SIP Account SIP Number Common Setting Speaking Volume Control Listening Volume Control Minimum is the quietest, and Maximum is the loudest. Enter the loudness that the NVG2053 uses for speech that it receives from the peer device. Enable G.168
(Echo Cancellation) Enable VAD
(Voice Active Detector) Back Apply Cancel Minimum is the quietest, and Maximum is the loudest. Select this if you want to eliminate the echo caused by the sound of your voice reverberating in the telephone receiver while you talk. Select this if the NVG2053 should stop transmitting when you are not speaking. This reduces the bandwidth the NVG2053 uses. Click Back to return to the previous screen without saving. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NVG2053. Click Cancel to set every field in this screen to its last-saved value. NVG2053 Users Guide 179 Chapter 17 Voice 17.6 The Phone Region Screen Use this screen to maintain settings that depend on which region of the world the NVG2053 is in. To access this screen, click VoIP > Phone > Region. Figure 76 VoIP > Phone > Region Each field is described in the following table. Table 60 VoIP > Phone > Region LABEL Country Call Service Mode DESCRIPTION Select the place in which the NVG2053 is located. Select the mode for supplementary phone services (call hold, call waiting, call transfer and three-way conference calls) that your VoIP service provider supports. Europe Type - use supplementary phone services in European mode USA Type - use supplementary phone services American mode You might have to subscribe to these services to use them. Contact your VoIP service provider. Click this to save your changes and to apply them to the NVG2053. Click this to set every field in this screen to its last-saved value. Apply Cancel 17.7 The Speed Dial Screen Use this screen to add, edit, or remove speed-dial numbers for outgoing calls. Speed dial provides shortcuts for dialing frequently-used (VoIP) phone numbers. You also have to create speed-dial entries if you want to call SIP numbers that contain letters. Once you have configured a speed dial rule, you can use a shortcut
(the speed dial number, #01 for example) on your phone's keypad to call the phone number. 180 NVG2053 Users Guide To access this screen, click VoIP > Call Rules > Speed Dial. Figure 77 VoIP > Call Rules > Speed Dial Chapter 17 Voice Each field is described in the following table. Table 61 VoIP > Phone Book > Speed Dial LABEL Phone Book
DESCRIPTION Use this section to look at all the speed-dial entries and to edit them. This field displays the index number of each entry. This field displays the speed-dial number you should dial to use this entry. This field displays the SIP number the NVG2053 calls when you dial the speed-dial number. This field displays the name of the party you call when you dial the speed-dial number. Use this field to edit or erase the speed-dial entry. Number Description Modify Click the Edit icon to open a screen where you can modify an entry. Apply Cancel Click the Delete icon to erase this speed-dial entry. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NVG2053. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. NVG2053 Users Guide 181 Chapter 17 Voice 17.7.1 The Speed Dial Edit Screen Use this screen to create or edit speed-dial entries. Click an entrys Edit icon in the Speed Dial screen. Figure 78 VoIP > Call Rules > Speed Dial: Edit Each field is described in the following table. Table 62 VoIP > Phone Book > Speed Dial: Edit LABEL Number DESCRIPTION Enter the SIP number you want the NVG2053 to call when you dial the speed-dial number. Enter a name to identify the party you call when you dial the speed-dial number. You can use up to 127 printable ASCII characters. Click Back to return to the previous screen without saving. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NVG2053. Click Cancel to set every field in this screen to its last-saved value. Description Back Apply Cancel 17.8 The PSTN call through Screen Use this screen to set up the PSTN line you use to make regular PSTN phone calls. Use a prefix number to make a regular call. When the device does not have power, you can make regular calls without dialing a prefix number. When the VoIP service is not available or the NVG2053 does not have power, the phone(s) connected to the PHONE 2 port can still be used for making PSTN calls. You can also use the PSTN call through screen to specify phone numbers that should always use the regular phone service (without having to dial a prefix number). Do this for emergency numbers (like those for contacting police, fire or emergency medical services). 182 NVG2053 Users Guide To access this screen, click VoIP > Call Rules > PSTN call through. Figure 79 VoIP > Call Rules > PSTN call through Chapter 17 Voice Each field is described in the following table. Table 63 VoIP > PSTN Line > General LABEL PSTN Line Pre-
fix Number DESCRIPTION Enter a prefix (up to seven numbers) you dial before you dial the phone number, if you want to make a regular phone call while one of your SIP accounts is registered. These numbers tell the NVG2053 that you want to make a regular phone call. Enter phone numbers (for regular calls, not VoIP calls) that you want to dial without the prefix number. For example, you should enter emergency numbers. Relay to PSTN Line Apply Cancel The number (1 - 9) is not a speed-dial number. It is just a sequential value that is not associated with any phone number. Click this to save your changes and to apply them to the NVG2053. Click this to set every field in this screen to its last-saved value. 17.9 Technical Reference This section contains background material relevant to the VoIP screens. VoIP VoIP is the sending of voice signals over Internet Protocol. This allows you to make phone calls and send faxes over the Internet at a fraction of the cost of using the traditional circuit-switched telephone network. You can also use servers to run telephone service applications like PBX services and voice mail. Internet Telephony Service Provider (ITSP) companies provide VoIP service. NVG2053 Users Guide 183 Chapter 17 Voice Circuit-switched telephone networks require 64 kilobits per second (Kbps) in each direction to handle a telephone call. VoIP can use advanced voice coding techniques with compression to reduce the required bandwidth. SIP The Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) is an application-layer control (signaling) protocol that handles the setting up, altering and tearing down of voice and multimedia sessions over the Internet. SIP signaling is separate from the media for which it handles sessions. The media that is exchanged during the session can use a different path from that of the signaling. SIP handles telephone calls and can interface with traditional circuit-
switched telephone networks. SIP Identities A SIP account uses an identity (sometimes referred to as a SIP address). A complete SIP identity is called a SIP URI (Uniform Resource Identifier). A SIP account's URI identifies the SIP account in a way similar to the way an e-mail address identifies an e-mail account. The format of a SIP identity is SIP-
Number@SIP-Service-Domain. SIP Number The SIP number is the part of the SIP URI that comes before the @ symbol. A SIP number can use letters like in an e-mail address (johndoe@your-ITSP.com for example) or numbers like a telephone number (1122334455@VoIP-provider.com for example). SIP Service Domain The SIP service domain of the VoIP service provider is the domain name in a SIP URI. For example, if the SIP address is 1122334455@VoIP-provider.com, then VoIP-provider.com is the SIP service domain. SIP Registration Each NVG2053 is an individual SIP User Agent (UA). To provide voice service, it has a public IP address for SIP and RTP protocols to communicate with other servers. A SIP user agent has to register with the SIP registrar and must provide information about the users it represents, as well as its current IP address (for the routing of incoming SIP requests). After successful registration, the SIP server knows that the users (identified by their dedicated SIP URIs) are represented by 184 NVG2053 Users Guide Chapter 17 Voice the UA, and knows the IP address to which the SIP requests and responses should be sent. Registration is initiated by the User Agent Client (UAC) running in the VoIP gateway (the NVG2053). The gateway must be configured with information letting it know where to send the REGISTER message, as well as the relevant user and authorization data. A SIP registration has a limited lifespan. The User Agent Client must renew its registration within this lifespan. If it does not do so, the registration data will be deleted from the SIP registrar's database and the connection broken. The NVG2053 attempts to register all enabled subscriber ports when it is switched on. When you enable a subscriber port that was previously disabled, the NVG2053 attempts to register the port immediately. Authorization Requirements SIP registrations (and subsequent SIP requests) require a username and password for authorization. These credentials are validated via a challenge /
response system using the HTTP digest mechanism (as detailed in RFC3261, "SIP:
Session Initiation Protocol"). SIP Servers SIP is a client-server protocol. A SIP client is an application program or device that sends SIP requests. A SIP server responds to the SIP requests. When you use SIP to make a VoIP call, it originates at a client and terminates at a server. A SIP client could be a computer or a SIP phone. One device can act as both a SIP client and a SIP server. SIP User Agent A SIP user agent can make and receive VoIP telephone calls. This means that SIP can be used for peer-to-peer communications even though it is a client-server protocol. In the following figure, either A or B can act as a SIP user agent client to initiate a call. A and B can also both act as a SIP user agent to receive the call. Figure 80 SIP User Agent NVG2053 Users Guide 185 Chapter 17 Voice SIP Proxy Server A SIP proxy server receives requests from clients and forwards them to another server. In the following example, you want to use client device A to call someone who is using client device C. The client device (A in the figure) sends a call invitation to the SIP proxy server
(B). The SIP proxy server forwards the call invitation to C. Figure 81 SIP Proxy Server 1 2 SIP Redirect Server A SIP redirect server accepts SIP requests, translates the destination address to an IP address and sends the translated IP address back to the device that sent the request. Then the client device that originally sent the request can send requests to the IP address that it received back from the redirect server. Redirect servers do not initiate SIP requests. In the following example, you want to use client device A to call someone who is using client device C. 1 Client device A sends a call invitation for C to the SIP redirect server (B). 2 The SIP redirect server sends the invitation back to A with Cs IP address (or domain name). 186 NVG2053 Users Guide 3 Client device A then sends the call invitation to client device C. Figure 82 SIP Redirect Server Chapter 17 Voice SIP Register Server A SIP register server maintains a database of SIP identity-to-IP address (or domain name) mapping. The register server checks your user name and password when you register. RTP When you make a VoIP call using SIP, the RTP (Real time Transport Protocol) is used to handle voice data transfer. See RFC 1889 for details on RTP. Pulse Code Modulation Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) measures analog signal amplitudes at regular time intervals and converts them into bits. NVG2053 Users Guide 187 Chapter 17 Voice SIP Call Progression The following figure displays the basic steps in the setup and tear down of a SIP call. A calls B. Table 64 SIP Call Progression A 1. INVITE 4. ACK 6. BYE 5.Dialogue (voice traffic) B 2. Ringing 3. OK 7. OK 1 A sends a SIP INVITE request to B. This message is an invitation for B to participate in a SIP telephone call. 2 B sends a response indicating that the telephone is ringing. 3 B sends an OK response after the call is answered. 4 A then sends an ACK message to acknowledge that B has answered the call. 5 Now A and B exchange voice media (talk). 6 After talking, A hangs up and sends a BYE request. 7 B replies with an OK response confirming receipt of the BYE request and the call is terminated. SIP Call Progression Through Proxy Servers Usually, the SIP UAC sets up a phone call by sending a request to the SIP proxy server. Then, the proxy server looks up the destination to which the call should be forwarded (according to the URI requested by the SIP UAC). The request may be forwarded to more than one proxy server before arriving at its destination. The response to the request goes to all the proxy servers through which the request passed, in reverse sequence. Once the session is set up, session traffic is sent between the UAs directly, bypassing all the proxy servers in between. 188 NVG2053 Users Guide Chapter 17 Voice The following figure shows the SIP and session traffic flow between the user agents (UA 1 and UA 2) and the proxy servers (this example shows two proxy servers, PROXY 1 and PROXY 2). Figure 83 SIP Call Through Proxy Servers PROXY 1 PROXY 2 SIP SIP UA 1 SIP & RTP SIP UA 2 The following table shows the SIP call progression. Table 65 SIP Call Progression UA 1 PROXY 1 Invite PROXY 2 UA 2 Invite 100 Trying 180 Ringing 200 OK Invite 100 Trying 180 Ringing 200 OK 180 Ringing 200 OK RTP BYE ACK RTP 200 OK 1 User Agent 1 sends a SIP INVITE request to Proxy 1. This message is an invitation to User Agent 2 to participate in a SIP telephone call. Proxy 1 sends a response indicating that it is trying to complete the request. NVG2053 Users Guide 189 Chapter 17 Voice 2 Proxy 1 sends a SIP INVITE request to Proxy 2. Proxy 2 sends a response indicating that it is trying to complete the request. 3 Proxy 2 sends a SIP INVITE request to User Agent 2. 4 User Agent 2 sends a response back to Proxy 2 indicating that the phone is ringing. The response is relayed back to User Agent 1 via Proxy 1. 5 User Agent 2 sends an OK response to Proxy 2 after the call is answered. This is also relayed back to User Agent 1 via Proxy 1. 6 User Agent 1 and User Agent 2 exchange RTP packets containing voice data directly, without involving the proxies. 7 When User Agent 2 hangs up, he sends a BYE request. 8 User Agent 1 replies with an OK response confirming receipt of the BYE request, and the call is terminated. Voice Coding A codec (coder/decoder) codes analog voice signals into digital signals and decodes the digital signals back into analog voice signals. The NVG2053 supports the following codecs. G.711 is a Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) waveform codec. PCM measures analog signal amplitudes at regular time intervals and converts them into digital samples. G.711 provides very good sound quality but requires 64 kbps of bandwidth. G.726 is an Adaptive Differential PCM (ADPCM) waveform codec that uses a lower bitrate than standard PCM conversion. ADPCM converts analog audio into digital signals based on the difference between each audio sample and a prediction based on previous samples. The more similar the audio sample is to the prediction, the less space needed to describe it. G.726 operates at 16, 24, 32 or 40 kbps. G.729 is an Analysis-by-Synthesis (AbS) hybrid waveform codec that uses a filter based on information about how the human vocal tract produces sounds. G.729 provides good sound quality and reduces the required bandwidth to 8 kbps. Voice Activity Detection/Silence Suppression Voice Activity Detection (VAD) detects whether or not speech is present. This lets the NVG2053 reduce the bandwidth that a call uses by not transmitting silent packets when you are not speaking. 190 NVG2053 Users Guide Chapter 17 Voice Comfort Noise Generation When using VAD, the NVG2053 generates comfort noise when the other party is not speaking. The comfort noise lets you know that the line is still connected as total silence could easily be mistaken for a lost connection. Echo Cancellation G.168 is an ITU-T standard for eliminating the echo caused by the sound of your voice reverberating in the telephone receiver while you talk. MWI (Message Waiting Indication) Enable Message Waiting Indication (MWI) enables your phone to give you a messagewaiting (beeping) dial tone when you have a voice message(s). Your VoIP service provider must have a messaging system that sends message waiting status SIP packets as defined in RFC 3842. 17.9.1 Quality of Service (QoS) Quality of Service (QoS) refers to both a network's ability to deliver data with minimum delay, and the networking methods used to provide bandwidth for real-
time multimedia applications. Type of Service (ToS) Network traffic can be classified by setting the ToS (Type of Service) values at the data source (for example, at the NVG2053) so a server can decide the best method of delivery, that is the least cost, fastest route and so on. DiffServ DiffServ is a class of service (CoS) model that marks packets so that they receive specific per-hop treatment at DiffServ-compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow. Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points (DSCP) indicating the level of service desired. This allows the intermediary DiffServ-compliant network devices to handle the packets differently depending on the code points without the need to negotiate paths or remember state information for every flow. In addition, applications do not have to request a particular service or give advanced notice of where the traffic is going.3 3. The NVG2053 does not support DiffServ at the time of writing. NVG2053 Users Guide 191 Chapter 17 Voice DSCP and Per-Hop Behavior DiffServ defines a new DS (Differentiated Services) field to replace the Type of Service (TOS) field in the IP header. The DS field contains a 2-bit unused field and a 6-bit DSCP field which can define up to 64 service levels. The following figure illustrates the DS field. DSCP is backward compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so that non-DiffServ compliant, ToS-enabled network device will not conflict with the DSCP mapping. Figure 84 DiffServ: Differentiated Service Field DSCP
(6-bit) Unused
(2-bit) The DSCP value determines the forwarding behavior, the PHB (Per-Hop Behavior), that each packet gets across the DiffServ network. Based on the marking rule, different kinds of traffic can be marked for different priorities of forwarding. Resources can then be allocated according to the DSCP values and the configured policies. 17.9.2 Phone Services Overview Supplementary services such as call hold, call waiting, and call transfer. are generally available from your VoIP service provider. The NVG2053 supports the following services:
Call Hold Call Waiting Making a Second Call Call Transfer Call Forwarding Three-Way Conference Internal Calls Call Park and Pickup Do not Disturb Note: To take full advantage of the supplementary phone services available through the NVG2053's phone ports, you may need to subscribe to the services from your VoIP service provider. 192 NVG2053 Users Guide Chapter 17 Voice 17.9.2.1 The Flash Key Flashing means to press the hook for a short period of time (a few hundred milliseconds) before releasing it. On newer telephones, there should be a "flash"
key (button) that generates the signal electronically. If the flash key is not available, you can tap (press and immediately release) the hook by hand to achieve the same effect. However, using the flash key is preferred since the timing is much more precise. With manual tapping, if the duration is too long, it may be interpreted as hanging up by the NVG2053. You can invoke all the supplementary services by using the flash key. 17.9.2.2 Europe Type Supplementary Phone Services This section describes how to use supplementary phone services with the Europe Type Call Service Mode. Commands for supplementary services are listed in the table below. After pressing the flash key, if you do not issue the sub-command before the default sub-command timeout (2 seconds) expires or issue an invalid sub-
command, the current operation will be aborted. Table 66 European Flash Key Commands COMMAND SUB-
DESCRIPTION COMMAND Flash Flash Flash Flash 0 1 2 Flash Flash 3
*98#
European Call Hold Put a current call on hold to place a second call. Switch back to the call (if there is no second call). Drop the call presently on hold or reject an incoming call which is waiting for answer. Disconnect the current phone connection and answer the incoming call or resume with caller presently on hold. 1. Switch back and forth between two calls. 2. Put a current call on hold to answer an incoming call. 3. Separate the current three-way conference call into two individual calls (one is on-line, the other is on hold). Create three-way conference connection. Transfer the call to another phone. Call hold allows you to put a call (A) on hold by pressing the flash key. If you have another call, press the flash key and then 2 to switch back and forth between caller A and B by putting either one on hold. NVG2053 Users Guide 193 Chapter 17 Voice Press the flash key and then 0 to disconnect the call presently on hold and keep the current call on line. Press the flash key and then 1 to disconnect the current call and resume the call on hold. If you hang up the phone but a caller is still on hold, there will be a remind ring. European Call Waiting This allows you to place a call on hold while you answer another incoming call on the same telephone (directory) number. If there is a second call to a telephone number, you will hear a call waiting tone. Take one of the following actions. Reject the second call. Press the flash key and then press 0. Disconnect the first call and answer the second call. Either press the flash key and press 1, or just hang up the phone and then answer the phone after it rings. Put the first call on hold and answer the second call. Press the flash key and then 2. European Call Transfer Do the following to transfer an incoming call (that you have answered) to another phone. 1 Press the flash key to put the caller on hold. 2 When you hear the dial tone, dial *98# followed by the number to which you want to transfer the call. 3 After you hear the ring signal or the second party answers it, hang up the phone. European Three-Way Conference Use the following steps to make three-way conference calls. 1 When you are on the phone talking to someone, press the flash key to put the caller on hold and get a dial tone. 2 Dial a phone number directly to make another call. 194 NVG2053 Users Guide Chapter 17 Voice 3 When the second call is answered, press the flash key and press 3 to create a three-way conversation. 4 Hang up the phone to drop the connection. 5 If you want to separate the activated three-way conference into two individual connections (one is on-line, the other is on hold), press the flash key and press 2. 17.9.2.3 USA Type Supplementary Services This section describes how to use supplementary phone services with the USA Type Call Service Mode. Commands for supplementary services are listed in the table below. After pressing the flash key, if you do not issue the sub-command before the default sub-command timeout (2 seconds) expires or issue an invalid sub-
command, the current operation will be aborted. Table 67 USA Flash Key Commands COMMAND SUB-
DESCRIPTION COMMAND Flash Flash
*98#
USA Call Hold Put a current call on hold to place a second call. After the second call is successful, press the flash key again to have a three-way conference call. Put a current call on hold to answer an incoming call. Transfer the call to another phone. Call hold allows you to put a call (A) on hold by pressing the flash key. If you have another call, press the flash key to switch back and forth between caller A and B by putting either one on hold. If you hang up the phone but a caller is still on hold, there will be a remind ring. USA Call Waiting This allows you to place a call on hold while you answer another incoming call on the same telephone (directory) number. If there is a second call to your telephone number, you will hear a call waiting tone. Press the flash key to put the first call on hold and answer the second call. NVG2053 Users Guide 195 Chapter 17 Voice USA Call Transfer Do the following to transfer an incoming call (that you have answered) to another phone. 1 Press the flash key to put the caller on hold. 2 When you hear the dial tone, dial *98# followed by the number to which you want to transfer the call. 3 After you hear the ring signal or the second party answers it, hang up the phone. USA Three-Way Conference Use the following steps to make three-way conference calls. 1 When you are on the phone talking to someone (party A), press the flash key to put the caller on hold and get a dial tone. 2 Dial a phone number directly to make another call (to party B). 3 When party B answers the second call, press the flash key to create a three-way conversation. 4 Hang up the phone to drop the connection. 5 6 7 If you want to separate the activated three-way conference into two individual connections (with party A on-line and party B on hold), press the flash key. If you want to go back to the three-way conversation, press the flash key again. If you want to separate the activated three-way conference into two individual connections again, press the flash key. This time the party B is on-line and party A is on hold. 196 NVG2053 Users Guide CHAPTER 18 USB Service 18.1 Overview This chapter discusses the NVG2053s 3G Connection Setup screens. 3G (third generation) standards for the sending and receiving of voice, video, and wireless data in a mobile environment. You can attach a 3G wireless adapter to the USB port and set the NVG2053 to use this 3G connection as your WAN or a backup when the wired WAN connection fails. Figure 85 3G WAN Connection 18.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter The 3G Connection Setup screen lets you configure the 3G WAN connection
(Section 18.4 on page 198). 18.2 What You Need to Know 3G 3G (Third Generation) is a digital, packet-switched wireless technology. Bandwidth usage is optimized as multiple users share the same channel and bandwidth is only allocated to users when they send data. It allows fast transfer of voice and non-voice data and provides broadband Internet access to mobile devices. NVG2053 Users Guide 197 Chapter 18 USB Service 18.3 Before You Begin For the NVG2053, this type of wireless connection requires a connected 3G-
compatible USB device (see the included Quick Start Guide for installation information), and a 3G account with your local ISP. 18.4 The 3G Connection Setup Screen Use this screen to configure your 3G settings. Click Configuration > USB Service. At the time of writing, the 3G cards you can use in the NVG2053 are Huawei E169, Huawei E169G, Huawei E219, D-Link DVM-152 and D-Link DVM-156. Note: The actual data rate you obtain varies depending the 3G card you use, the signal strength to the service providers base station, and so on. Figure 86 USB Service > 3G Connection Setup 198 NVG2053 Users Guide Chapter 18 USB Service The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 68 USB Service > 3G Connection Setup LABEL PIN Code DESCRIPTION A PIN (Personal Identification Number) code is a key to a 3G card. Without the PIN code, you cannot use the 3G card. If your ISP enabled PIN code authentication, enter the 4-digit PIN code (0000 for example) provided by your ISP. If you enter the PIN code incorrectly, the 3G card may be blocked by your ISP and you cannot use the account to access the Internet. If your ISP disabled PIN code authentication, leave this field blank. Enter the APN (Access Point Name) provided by your service provider. Connections with different APNs may provide different services (such as Internet access or MMS (Multi-Media Messaging Service)) and charge method. You can enter up to 31 ASCII printable characters. Spaces are allowed. Enter the phone number (dial string) used to dial up a connection to your service providers base station. Your ISP should provide the phone number. For example, *99# is the dial string to establish a GPRS or 3G connection in Taiwan. Type the user name (of up to 70 ASCII printable characters) given to you by your service provider. Type the password (of up to 70 ASCII printable characters) associated with the user name above. Select the check box if you do not want the connection to time out. Clear the check box if you do not want the connection up all the time and specify an idle time-out in the Idle Timeout field. This value specifies the time in minutes that elapses before the NVG2053 automatically disconnects from the ISP. 0 means the Internet session will not timeout. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NVG2053. Click Cancel to return to the previous configuration. APN Code Dial Number Username Password Nailed-Up Connection Idle Timeout Apply Cancel NVG2053 Users Guide 199 Chapter 18 USB Service 200 NVG2053 Users Guide
| 1 | User's manual-2 | Users Manual | 3.45 MiB |
CHAPTER 19 Management 19.1 Overview This chapter explains how to configure TR-069 and remote management on the NVG2053. 19.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the TR-069 screen (Section 19.5 on page 204) to configure the NVG2053s TR-069 auto-configuration settings.
Use the WWW screen (Section 19.5 on page 204) to configure the NVG2053s HTTP management settings.
Use the Telnet screen (Section 19.5 on page 204) to specify which interfaces allow Telnet access and from which IP address the access can come.
Use the ICMP screen (Section 19.6 on page 205) to specify which of the NVG2053s interfaces will respond to Ping requests. 19.2 What You Need To Know Firewall Rules When you configure remote management to allow management from any network except the LAN, you still need to configure a firewall rule to allow access. See Chapter 13 on page 251 for details on configuring firewall rules. You can also disable a service on the NVG2053 by not allowing access for the service/protocol through any of the NVG2053 interfaces. Remote Management Sessions You may only have one remote management session running at a time. The NVG2053 automatically disconnects a remote management session of lower priority when another remote management session of higher priority starts. The priorities for the different types of remote management sessions are as follows. NVG2053 Users Guide 201 Chapter 19 Management 1 Telnet 2 HTTP Remote Management Limitations Remote management does not work when:
1 2 3 4 5 You have not enabled that service on the interface in the corresponding remote management screen. You have disabled that service in one of the remote management screens. The IP address in the Secured Client IP Address field does not match the client IP address. If it does not match, the NVG2053 will disconnect the session immediately. There is already another remote management session with an equal or higher priority running. You may only have one remote management session running at one time. There is a firewall rule that blocks it. System Timeout There is a default system management idle timeout of five minutes (three hundred seconds). The NVG2053 automatically logs you out if the management session remains idle for longer than this timeout period. The management session does not time out when a statistics screen is polling. You can change the timeout period in the Maintenance > General screen. 19.3 The TR-069 Screen TR-069 defines how Customer Premise Equipment (CPE), for example your NVG2053, can be managed over the WAN by an Auto Configuration Server (ACS). TR-069 is based on sending Remote Procedure Calls (RPCs) between an ACS and a client device. RPCs are sent in Extensible Markup Language (XML) format over HTTP or HTTPS. An administrator can use an ACS to remotely set up the NVG2053, modify settings, perform firmware upgrades as well as monitor and diagnose the NVG2053. You have to enable the device to be managed by the ACS and specify the ACS IP address or domain name and username and password. 202 NVG2053 Users Guide Chapter 19 Management Click Configuration > Management > TR-069 to open the following screen. Use this screen to configure your NVG2053 to be managed by an ACS. Figure 87 Management > TR-069 The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 69 Management > TR-069 DESCRIPTION LABEL Select Enable to activate remote management via TR-069 on the TR069 WAN. Otherwise, select Disable. Enter the URL or IP address of the auto-configuration server. Enter the TR-069 user name for authentication with the auto-
configuration server. Enter the TR-069 password for authentication with the auto-
configuration server. Enter the connection request user name. ACS URL ACS Username ACS Password Connection Request Username Connection Request Password Periodic Inform Interval When the ACS makes a connection request to the NVG2053, this user name is used to authenticate the ACS. Enter the connection request password. When the ACS makes a connection request to the NVG2053, this password is used to authenticate the ACS. The NVG2053 can initiate a connection to the ACS using the pre-
configured address at any time. Enter the time interval (in seconds) at which the NVG2053 sends information to the auto-configuration server. Apply Cancel 0 means the NVG2053 will not establish periodic communication with the ACS. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NVG2053. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. NVG2053 Users Guide 203 Chapter 19 Management 19.4 The WWW Screen Use this screen to configure the NVG2053s HTTP management settings. Note: If you disable the HTTP service in the WWW screen, then the NVG2053 blocks all HTTP connection attempts. Click Management > Remote MGMT > WWW to open the following screen. Figure 88 Remote MGMT > WWW The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 70 Remote MGMT > WWW LABEL Port DESCRIPTION You may change the server port number for a service if needed, however you must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management. Select the interface(s) through which a computer may access the NVG2053 using this service. A secure client is a trusted computer that is allowed to communicate with the NVG2053 using this service. Access Status Secured Client IP Address Select All to allow any computer to access the NVG2053 using this service. Choose Selected to just allow the computer with the IP address that you specify to access the NVG2053 using this service. Click this to save your changes and to apply them to the NVG2053. Click this to set every field in this screen to its last-saved value. Apply Cancel 19.5 The Telnet Screen Use this screen to specify which interfaces allow Telnet access and from which IP address the access can come. 204 NVG2053 Users Guide Click Management > Remote MGMT > Telnet to open the following screen. Figure 89 Remote MGMT > Telnet Chapter 19 Management The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 71 Remote MGMT > Telnet LABEL Port DESCRIPTION You may change the server port number for a service if needed, however you must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management. Select the interface(s) through which a computer may access the NVG2053 using this service. A secure client is a trusted computer that is allowed to communicate with the NVG2053 using this service. Access Status Secured Client IP Address Select All to allow any computer to access the NVG2053 using this service. Choose Selected to just allow the computer with the IP address that you specify to access the NVG2053 using this service. Click this to save your changes and to apply them to the NVG2053. Click this to set every field in this screen to its last-saved value. Apply Cancel 19.6 The ICMP Screen Use this screen to help keep the NVG2053 hidden from probing attempts. You can specify which of the NVG2053s interfaces will respond to Ping requests. Click Management > Remote MGMT > ICMP to open the following screen. Figure 90 Remote MGMT > ICMP NVG2053 Users Guide 205 Chapter 19 Management The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 72 Remote MGMT > ICMP LABEL Respond to Ping on DESCRIPTION Select the interface(s) that you want to reply to incoming Ping requests. Apply Cancel Select Disable to have the NVG2053 not respond to any Ping requests that come into an interface. Click this to save your changes and to apply them to the NVG2053. Click this to set every field in this screen to its last-saved value. 206 NVG2053 Users Guide CHAPTER 20 Maintenance 20.1 Overview This chapter provides information on the Maintenance > General screen. 20.2 What You Can Do Use the General screen (Section 20.3 on page 207) to enter a name to identify the NVG2053 in the network, and configure your devices domain name and management inactivity timeout. 20.3 General Screen Use this screen to enter a name to identify the NVG2053 in the network and set the management inactivity timeout. Click Maintenance > General. The following screen displays. Figure 91 Maintenance > General The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 73 Maintenance > General DESCRIPTION LABEL System Name System Name is a unique name to identify the NVG2053 in an Ethernet network. Enter the domain name you want to give to the NVG2053. Domain Name NVG2053 Users Guide 207 Chapter 20 Maintenance Table 73 Maintenance > General LABEL DESCRIPTION Type how many minutes a management session can be left idle before Administrator Inactivity Timer the session times out. The default is 5 minutes. After it times out you have to log in with your password again. Very long idle timeouts may have security risks. A value of "0" means a management session never times out, no matter how long it has been left idle (not recommended). Click Apply to save your changes back to the NVG2053. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. Apply Cancel 208 NVG2053 Users Guide CHAPTER 21 Password 21.1 Overview This chapter contains information about configuring the Maintenance >
Password screen. 21.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the Password screen (Section 21.2 on page 209) to configure the system password. 21.2 Password Screen Use the Password screen to change your NVG2053s password (recommended). Click Maintenance > Password. Figure 92 Maintenance > Password The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 74 Maintenance > Password LABEL Old Password New Password DESCRIPTION Type the default password or the existing password you use to access the system in this field. Type your new system password (up to 30 characters). Note that as you type a password, the screen displays an asterisk (*) for each character you type. Retype to Confirm Type the new password again in this field. NVG2053 Users Guide 209 Chapter 21 Password Table 74 Maintenance > Password LABEL Apply Cancel DESCRIPTION Click Apply to save your changes back to the NVG2053. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 210 NVG2053 Users Guide CHAPTER 22 Time 22.1 Overview This chapter provides information on the Time screen. 22.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the Time Setting screen (Section 22.2 on page 212) to change your NVG2053s time and date. NVG2053 Users Guide 211 Chapter 22 Time 22.2 Time Setting Screen Use this screen to configure the NVG2053s time based on your local time zone. To change your NVG2053s time and date, click Maintenance > Time. The screen appears as shown. Figure 93 Maintenance > Time he following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Table 75 Maintenance > Time LABEL Current Time and Date Current Time Current Date Time and Date Setup Manual This field displays the time of your NVG2053. This field displays the date of your NVG2053. Select this radio button to enter the time and date manually. If you configure a new time and date, Time Zone and Daylight Saving at the same time, the new time and date you entered has priority and the Time Zone and Daylight Saving settings do not affect it. This field displays the last updated time from the time server or the last time configured manually. New Time
(hh:mm:ss) When you set Time and Date Setup to Manual, enter the new time in this field and then click Apply. 212 NVG2053 Users Guide Table 75 Maintenance > Time LABEL New Date
(yyyy/mm/dd) Get from Time Server Auto User Defined Time Server Address Time Zone Setup Time Zone Daylight Savings Start Date Chapter 22 Time DESCRIPTION This field displays the last updated date from the time server or the last date configured manually. When you set Time and Date Setup to Manual, enter the new date in this field and then click Apply. Select this radio button to have the NVG2053 get the time and date from the time server you specified below. Select Auto to have the NVG2053 automatically search for an available time server and synchronize the date and time with the time server after you click Apply. Select User Defined Time Server Address and enter the IP address or URL (up to 20 extended ASCII characters in length) of your time server. Check with your ISP/network administrator if you are unsure of this information. Choose the time zone of your location. This will set the time difference between your time zone and Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). Daylight saving is a period from late spring to fall when many countries set their clocks ahead of normal local time by one hour to give more daytime light in the evening. Select this option if you use Daylight Saving Time. Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time starts if you selected Daylight Savings. The o'clock field uses the 24 hour format. Here are a couple of examples:
Daylight Saving Time starts in most parts of the United States on the first Sunday of April. Each time zone in the United States starts using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M. local time. So in the United States you would select First, Sunday, April and type 2 in the o'clock field. Daylight Saving Time starts in the European Union on the last Sunday of March. All of the time zones in the European Union start using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment (1 A.M. GMT or UTC). So in the European Union you would select Last, Sunday, March. The time you type in the o'clock field depends on your time zone. In Germany for instance, you would type 2 because Germany's time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1). NVG2053 Users Guide 213 Chapter 22 Time Table 75 Maintenance > Time LABEL End Date DESCRIPTION Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time ends if you selected Daylight Savings. The o'clock field uses the 24 hour format. Here are a couple of examples:
Daylight Saving Time ends in the United States on the last Sunday of October. Each time zone in the United States stops using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M. local time. So in the United States you would select Last, Sunday, October and type 2 in the o'clock field. Daylight Saving Time ends in the European Union on the last Sunday of October. All of the time zones in the European Union stop using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment (1 A.M. GMT or UTC). So in the European Union you would select Last, Sunday, October. The time you type in the o'clock field depends on your time zone. In Germany for instance, you would type 2 because Germany's time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1). Click Apply to save your changes back to the NVG2053. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. Apply Cancel 214 NVG2053 Users Guide CHAPTER 23 Firmware Upgrade 23.1 Overview This chapter shows you how to upload a new firmware. 23.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the Firmware Upgrade screen (Section 23.2 on page 215) to upload firmware to your NVG2053. 23.2 Firmware Upgrade Screen Find firmware at www.zyxel.com in a file that (usually) uses the system model name with a *.bin extension, e.g., NVG2053.bin. The upload process uses HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) and may take up to two minutes. After a successful upload, the system will reboot. Click Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade. Follow the instructions in this screen to upload firmware to your NVG2053. Figure 94 Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade NVG2053 Users Guide 215 Chapter 23 Firmware Upgrade The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 76 Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade LABEL File Path DESCRIPTION Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse... to find it. Click Browse... to find the .bin file you want to upload. Remember that you must decompress compressed (.zip) files before you can upload them. Click Upload to begin the upload process. This process may take up to two minutes. Browse... Upload Note: Do not turn off the NVG2053 while firmware upload is in progress!
After you see the Firmware Upgrade is proceeding screen, wait six minutes before logging into the NVG2053 again. The NVG2053 automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect. In some operating systems, you may see the following icon on your desktop. Figure 95 Network Temporarily Disconnected After six minutes, log in again and check your new firmware version in the Status screen. If the upload was not successful, an error message appears. Click OK to go back to the Firmware screen. 216 NVG2053 Users Guide CHAPTER 24 Backup/Restore 24.1 Overview This chapter shows you how to backup, restore and reset your NVG2053. Backup configuration allows you to back up (save) the NVG2053s current configuration to a file on your computer. Once your NVG2053 is configured and functioning properly, it is highly recommended that you back up your configuration file before making configuration changes. The backup configuration file will be useful in case you need to return to your previous settings. Restore configuration allows you to upload a new or previously saved configuration file from your computer to your NVG2053. 24.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the Backup/Restore screen (Section 24.2 on page 218) to view information related to factory defaults, backup configuration, and restoring configuration. NVG2053 Users Guide 217 Chapter 24 Backup/Restore 24.2 Backup/Restore Screen Click Maintenance > Backup/Restore. Information related to factory defaults, backup configuration, and restoring configuration appears as shown next. Figure 96 Maintenance > Backup/Restore The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 77 Maintenance > Backup/Restore LABEL Backup DESCRIPTION Click Backup to save the NVG2053s current configuration to your computer. Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse... to find it. Click Browse... to find the file you want to upload. Remember that you must decompress compressed (.ZIP) files before you can upload them. File Path Browse... 218 NVG2053 Users Guide Chapter 24 Backup/Restore Table 77 Maintenance > Backup/Restore LABEL Upload DESCRIPTION Click Upload to begin the upload process. Note: Do not turn off the NVG2053 while configuration file upload is in progress. After you see a configuration upload successful screen, you must then wait one minute before logging into the NVG2053 again. The NVG2053 automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect. If you see an error screen, click OK to return to the Backup/Restore screen. Pressing the Reset button in this section clears all user-entered configuration information and returns the NVG2053 to its factory defaults. You can also press the RESET button on the side panel to reset the factory defaults of your NVG2053. Refer to the chapter about introducing the Web Configurator for more information on the RESET button. Reset Note: If you uploaded the default configuration file you may need to change the IP address of your computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default NVG2053 IP address (192.168.1.1). See Appendix B on page 247 for details on how to set up your computers IP address. NVG2053 Users Guide 219 Chapter 24 Backup/Restore 220 NVG2053 Users Guide CHAPTER 25 Language 25.1 Overview This chapter shows you how to change the Web Configurators display language. 25.2 What You Can Do Use the Language screen (Section 25.3 on page 221) to change the language for the Web Configurator display. 25.3 The Language Screen Select the language you prefer and click Apply. The Web Configurator language changes after a while without restarting the NVG2053. Click Maintenance >
Language. At the time of writing, the NVG2053 supports English only. Figure 97 Language NVG2053 Users Guide 221 Chapter 25 Language 222 NVG2053 Users Guide CHAPTER 26 Restart 26.1 Overview This chapter shows you how to restart your NVG2053. 26.2 What You Can Do Use the Restart screen (Section 26.3 on page 223) to reboot the NVG2053 without turning the power off. 26.3 The Restart Screen System restart allows you to reboot the NVG2053 without turning the power off. Click Maintenance > Restart to open the following screen. Figure 98 Maintenance > Restart Click Restart to have the NVG2053 reboot. This does not affect the NVG2053's configuration. NVG2053 Users Guide 223 Chapter 26 Restart 224 NVG2053 Users Guide CHAPTER 27 Troubleshooting This chapter offers some suggestions to solve problems you might encounter. The potential problems are divided into the following categories.
Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs
NVG2053 Access and Login
Internet Access
Resetting the NVG2053 to Its Factory Defaults
Wireless Router/AP Troubleshooting 27.1 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs The NVG2053 does not turn on. None of the LEDs turn on. 1 Make sure you are using the power adaptor or cord included with the NVG2053. 2 Make sure the power adaptor or cord is connected to the NVG2053 and plugged in to an appropriate power source. Make sure the power source is turned on. 3 Disconnect and re-connect the power adaptor or cord to the NVG2053. 4 If the problem continues, contact the vendor. One of the LEDs does not behave as expected. 1 Make sure you understand the normal behavior of the LED. See Section 1.5 on page 24. 2 Check the hardware connections. See the Quick Start Guide. NVG2053 Users Guide 225 Chapter 27 Troubleshooting 3 Inspect your cables for damage. Contact the vendor to replace any damaged cables. 4 Disconnect and re-connect the power adaptor to the NVG2053. 5 If the problem continues, contact the vendor. 27.2 NVG2053 Access and Login I dont know the IP address of my NVG2053. 1 2 The default IP address is 192.168.1.1. If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, you might get the IP address of the NVG2053 by looking up the IP address of the default gateway for your computer. To do this in most Windows computers, click Start > Run, enter cmd, and then enter ipconfig. The IP address of the Default Gateway might be the IP address of the NVG2053 (it depends on the network), so enter this IP address in your Internet browser. 3 Reset your NVG2053 to change all settings back to their default. This means your current settings are lost. See Section 27.4 on page 229 in the Troubleshooting for information on resetting your NVG2053. I forgot the password. 1 2 The default password is 1234. If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 27.4 on page 229. I cannot see or access the Login screen in the Web Configurator. 1 Make sure you are using the correct IP address.
The default IP address is 192.168.1.1. 226 NVG2053 Users Guide Chapter 27 Troubleshooting
If you changed the IP address (Section 9.4 on page 123), use the new IP address.
If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, see the troubleshooting suggestions for I dont know the IP address of my NVG2053. 2 Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See the Quick Start Guide. 3 Make sure your Internet browser does not block pop-up windows and has JavaScripts and Java enabled. See Appendix A on page 235. 4 Make sure your computer is in the same subnet as the NVG2053. (If you know that there are routers between your computer and the NVG2053, skip this step.)
If there is a DHCP server on your network, make sure your computer is using a dynamic IP address. See Section 10.3 on page 126.
If there is no DHCP server on your network, make sure your computers IP address is in the same subnet as the NVG2053. See Appendix C on page 263. 5 Reset the device to its factory defaults, and try to access the NVG2053 with the default IP address. See Section 24.2 on page 218. 6 If the problem continues, contact the network administrator or vendor, or try one of the advanced suggestions. Advanced Suggestion
If your computer is connected to the WAN port or is connected wirelessly, use a computer that is connected to a LAN/ETHERNET port. I can see the Login screen, but I cannot log in to the NVG2053. 1 Make sure you have entered the password correctly. The default password is 1234. This field is case-sensitive, so make sure [Caps Lock] is not on. 2 This can happen when you fail to log out properly from your last session. Try logging in again after 5 minutes (default). 3 Disconnect and re-connect the power adaptor or cord to the NVG2053. 4 If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 27.4 on page 229. NVG2053 Users Guide 227 Chapter 27 Troubleshooting 27.3 Internet Access I cannot access the Internet. 1 Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See the Quick Start Guide. 2 Make sure you entered your ISP account information correctly in the wizard or Broadband screen. These fields are case-sensitive, so make sure [Caps Lock] is not on. 3 If you are trying to access the Internet wirelessly, make sure the wireless settings in the wireless client are the same as the settings in the NVG2053. 4 Disconnect all the cables from your device, and follow the directions in the Quick Start Guide again. 5 If the problem continues, contact your ISP. I cannot access the Internet anymore. I had access to the Internet (with the NVG2053), but my Internet connection is not available anymore. 1 Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See the Quick Start Guide and Section 1.5 on page 24. 2 Reboot the NVG2053. 3 If the problem continues, contact your ISP. The Internet connection is slow or intermittent. 1 There might be a lot of traffic on the network. Look at the LEDs, and check Section 1.5 on page 24. If the NVG2053 is sending or receiving a lot of information, try closing some programs that use the Internet, especially peer-to-peer applications. 228 NVG2053 Users Guide Chapter 27 Troubleshooting 2 Check the signal strength. If the signal strength is low, try moving the NVG2053 closer to the AP if possible, and look around to see if there are any devices that might be interfering with the wireless network (for example, microwaves, other wireless networks, and so on). 3 Reboot the NVG2053. 4 If the problem continues, contact the network administrator or vendor, or try one of the advanced suggestions. Advanced Suggestions
Check the settings for QoS. If it is disabled, you might consider activating it. If it is enabled, you might consider raising or lowering the priority for some applications. 27.4 Resetting the NVG2053 to Its Factory Defaults If you reset the NVG2053, you lose all of the changes you have made. The NVG2053 re-loads its default settings, and the password resets to 1234. You have to make all of your changes again. You will lose all of your changes when you push the RESET button. To reset the NVG2053, 1 Make sure the power LED is on. 2 Press the RESET button for longer than 10 seconds to set the NVG2053 back to its factory-default configurations. If the NVG2053 restarts automatically, wait for the NVG2053 to finish restarting, and log in to the Web Configurator. The password is 1234. If the NVG2053 does not restart automatically, disconnect and reconnect the NVG2053s power. Then, follow the directions above again. NVG2053 Users Guide 229 Chapter 27 Troubleshooting 27.5 Wireless Router/AP Troubleshooting I cannot access the NVG2053 or ping any computer from the WLAN. 1 Make sure the wireless LAN is enabled on the NVG2053 2 Make sure the wireless adapter on the wireless station is working properly. 3 Make sure the wireless adapter installed on your computer is IEEE 802.11 compatible and supports the same wireless standard as the NVG2053. 4 Make sure your computer (with a wireless adapter installed) is within the transmission range of the NVG2053. 5 Check that both the NVG2053 and your wireless station are using the same wireless and wireless security settings. 6 Make sure you allow the NVG2053 to be remotely accessed through the WLAN interface. Check your remote management settings.
See the chapter on Wireless LAN in the Users Guide for more information. 230 NVG2053 Users Guide CHAPTER 28 Product Specifications The following tables summarize the NVG2053s hardware and firmware features. Table 78 Hardware Features Device Dimensions 220 mm x 145 mm x 40 mm
(W x D x H) Device Weight Power Specification Ethernet ports 4-Port Switch Reset Button WPS button Wireless Switch Antenna Operation Environment 395 g Input: 100~240 V AC, 50~60 Hz Output: 12 V DC 1.5A Auto-negotiating: 10 Mbps, 100 Mbps, 1000 Mbps in either half-
duplex or full-duplex mode. Auto-crossover: Use either crossover or straight-through Ethernet cables. A combination of switch and router makes your NVG2053 a cost-
effective and viable network solution. You can add up to four computers to the NVG2053 without the cost of a hub when connecting to the Internet through the WAN port. You can add up to five computers to the NVG2053 when you connect to the Internet in AP mode. Add more than four computers to your LAN by using a hub. The reset button is built into the side panel. Use this button to restore the NVG2053 to its factory default settings. Press for 10 seconds to restore to factory default settings. Press the WPS on two WPS enabled devices within 120 seconds for a security-enabled wireless connection. Turn on or turn off the wireless function of the NVG2053 using this switch. There is no need to go into the Web Configurator. The NVG2053 is equipped with two 2dBi (2.4GHz) detachable antennas to provide clear radio transmission and reception on the wireless network. Temperature: 0 C ~ 40 C / 32F ~ 104F Humidity: 20% ~ 90%
Storage Environment Temperature: -30 C ~ 70 C / -22F ~ 158F Humidity: 20% ~ 95%
NVG2053 Users Guide 231 Chapter 28 Product Specifications Table 79 Firmware Features FEATURE Default IP Address Default Subnet Mask Default Password DHCP Pool Wireless Interface Default Wireless SSID Default Wireless DHCP Pool Size Device Management Wireless Functionality Firmware Upgrade Configuration Backup &
Restoration Network Address Translation (NAT) Firewall Remote Management Wireless LAN Scheduler Time and Date DESCRIPTION 192.168.1.1 255.255.255.0 (24 bits) 1234 192.168.1.33 to 192.168.1.64 Wireless LAN ZyXEL Wireless LAN: Same as LAN (32 from 192.168.1.33 to 192.168.1.64) Use the Web Configurator to easily configure the rich range of features on the NVG2053. Allows IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g and/or IEEE 802.11n wireless clients to connect to the NVG2053 wirelessly. Enable wireless security ( WPA(2)-PSK) and/or MAC filtering to protect your wireless network. Note: The NVG2053 may be prone to RF (Radio Frequency) interference from other 2.4 GHz devices such as microwave ovens, wireless phones, Bluetooth enabled devices, and other wireless LANs. Download new firmware (when available) from the ZyXEL web site and use the Web Configurator to put it on the NVG2053. Note: Only upload firmware for your specific model!
Make a copy of the NVG2053s configuration and put it back on the NVG2053 later if you decide you want to revert back to an earlier configuration. Each computer on your network must have its own unique IP address. Use NAT to convert a single public IP address to multiple private IP addresses for the computers on your network. You can configure firewall on the NVG2053 for secure Internet access. When the firewall is on, by default, all incoming traffic from the Internet to your network is blocked unless it is initiated from your network. This means that probes from the outside to your network are not allowed, but you can safely browse the Internet and download files for example. This allows you to decide whether a service (HTTP or Telnet traffic for example) from a computer on a network (LAN or WAN for example) can access the NVG2053. You can schedule the times the Wireless LAN is enabled/
disabled. Get the current time and date from an external server when you turn on your NVG2053. You can also set the time manually. These dates and times are then used in logs. 232 NVG2053 Users Guide Chapter 28 Product Specifications Table 79 Firmware Features FEATURE Port Forwarding DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) Dynamic DNS Support DESCRIPTION If you have a server (mail or web server for example) on your network, then use this feature to let people access it from the Internet. Use this feature to have the NVG2053 assign IP addresses, an IP default gateway and DNS servers to computers on your network. With Dynamic DNS (Domain Name System) support, you can use a fixed URL, www.zyxel.com for example, with a dynamic IP address. You must register for this service with a Dynamic DNS service provider. Logging IP Multicast QoS (Quality of Service) You can efficiently manage traffic on your network by reserving bandwidth and giving priority to certain types of traffic and/or to particular computers. IP Multicast is used to send traffic to a specific group of computers. The NVG2053 supports versions 1 and 2 of IGMP
(Internet Group Management Protocol) used to join multicast groups (see RFC 2236). Use logs for troubleshooting. You can view logs in the Web Configurator. PPPoE mimics a dial-up Internet access connection. The NVG2053 can communicate with other UPnP enabled devices in a network. You can configure the NVG2053 to use your SIP account(s) to make or receive phone calls over the Internet and your regular phone line. You can also configure speed-dial entries for frequently-used (VoIP) phone numbers. You can attach a 3G wireless adapter to the NVG2053s USB port and set the NVG2053 to use this 3G connection as your WAN or a backup when the wired WAN connection fails. PPPoE Universal Plug and Play
(UPnP) Voice over IP (VoIP) 3G NVG2053 Users Guide 233 Chapter 28 Product Specifications 234 NVG2053 Users Guide APPENDIX A Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions In order to use the web configurator you need to allow:
Web browser pop-up windows from your device.
JavaScripts (enabled by default).
Java permissions (enabled by default). Note: The screens used below belong to Internet Explorer version 6, 7 and 8. Screens for other Internet Explorer versions may vary. Internet Explorer Pop-up Blockers You may have to disable pop-up blocking to log into your device. Either disable pop-up blocking (enabled by default in Windows XP SP (Service Pack) 2) or allow pop-up blocking and create an exception for your devices IP address. Disable Pop-up Blockers 1 In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Pop-up Blocker and then select Turn Off Pop-up Blocker. Figure 99 Pop-up Blocker You can also check if pop-up blocking is disabled in the Pop-up Blocker section in the Privacy tab. NVG2053 Users Guide 235 Appendix A Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions 1 In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Internet Options, Privacy. 2 Clear the Block pop-ups check box in the Pop-up Blocker section of the screen. This disables any web pop-up blockers you may have enabled. Figure 100 Internet Options: Privacy 3 Click Apply to save this setting. Enable Pop-up Blockers with Exceptions Alternatively, if you only want to allow pop-up windows from your device, see the following steps. 1 In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Internet Options and then the Privacy tab. 236 NVG2053 Users Guide Appendix A Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions 2 Select Settingsto open the Pop-up Blocker Settings screen. Figure 101 Internet Options: Privacy 3 Type the IP address of your device (the web page that you do not want to have blocked) with the prefix http://. For example, http://192.168.167.1. NVG2053 Users Guide 237 Appendix A Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions 4 Click Add to move the IP address to the list of Allowed sites. Figure 102 Pop-up Blocker Settings 5 Click Close to return to the Privacy screen. 6 Click Apply to save this setting. JavaScripts If pages of the web configurator do not display properly in Internet Explorer, check that JavaScripts are allowed. 238 NVG2053 Users Guide Appendix A Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions 1 In Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Security tab. Figure 103 Internet Options: Security 2 Click the Custom Level... button. 3 Scroll down to Scripting. 4 Under Active scripting make sure that Enable is selected (the default). 5 Under Scripting of Java applets make sure that Enable is selected (the default). NVG2053 Users Guide 239 Appendix A Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions 6 Click OK to close the window. Figure 104 Security Settings - Java Scripting Java Permissions 1 From Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Security tab. 2 Click the Custom Level... button. 3 Scroll down to Microsoft VM. 4 Under Java permissions make sure that a safety level is selected. 240 NVG2053 Users Guide Appendix A Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions 5 Click OK to close the window. Figure 105 Security Settings - Java JAVA (Sun) 1 From Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Advanced tab. 2 Make sure that Use Java 2 for <applet> under Java (Sun) is selected. NVG2053 Users Guide 241 Appendix A Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions 3 Click OK to close the window. Figure 106 Java (Sun) Mozilla Firefox Mozilla Firefox 2.0 screens are used here. Screens for other versions may vary slightly. The steps below apply to Mozilla Firefox 3.0 as well. You can enable Java, Javascripts and pop-ups in one screen. Click Tools, then click Options in the screen that appears. Figure 107 Mozilla Firefox: TOOLS > Options 242 NVG2053 Users Guide Appendix A Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions Click Content to show the screen below. Select the check boxes as shown in the following screen. Figure 108 Mozilla Firefox Content Security Opera Opera 10 screens are used here. Screens for other versions may vary slightly. NVG2053 Users Guide 243 Appendix A Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions Allowing Pop-Ups From Opera, click Tools, then Preferences. In the General tab, go to Choose how you prefer to handle pop-ups and select Open all pop-ups. Figure 109 Opera: Allowing Pop-Ups 244 NVG2053 Users Guide Appendix A Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions Enabling Java From Opera, click Tools, then Preferences. In the Advanced tab, select Content from the left-side menu. Select the check boxes as shown in the following screen. Figure 110 Opera: Enabling Java To customize JavaScript behavior in the Opera browser, click JavaScript Options. Figure 111 Opera: JavaScript Options Select the items you want Operas JavaScript to apply. NVG2053 Users Guide 245 Appendix A Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions 246 NVG2053 Users Guide APPENDIX B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address Note: Your specific NVG2053 may not support all of the operating systems described in this appendix. See the product specifications for more information about which operating systems are supported. This appendix shows you how to configure the IP settings on your computer in order for it to be able to communicate with the other devices on your network. Windows Vista/XP/2000, Mac OS 9/OS X, and all versions of UNIX/LINUX include the software components you need to use TCP/IP on your computer. If you manually assign IP information instead of using a dynamic IP, make sure that your networks computers have IP addresses that place them in the same subnet. In this appendix, you can set up an IP address for:
Windows XP/NT/2000 on page 248
Windows Vista on page 251
Windows 7 on page 255
Mac OS X: 10.3 and 10.4 on page 259
Mac OS X: 10.5 and 10.6 on page 262
Linux: Ubuntu 8 (GNOME) on page 265
Linux: openSUSE 10.3 (KDE) on page 270 NVG2053 Users Guide 247 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address Windows XP/NT/2000 The following example uses the default Windows XP display theme but can also apply to Windows 2000 and Windows NT. 1 Click Start > Control Panel. 2 In the Control Panel, click the Network Connections icon. 248 NVG2053 Users Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 3 Right-click Local Area Connection and then select Properties. 4 On the General tab, select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) and then click Properties. NVG2053 Users Guide 249 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 5 The Internet Protocol TCP/IP Properties window opens. 6 Select Obtain an IP address automatically if your network administrator or ISP assigns your IP address dynamically. Select Use the following IP Address and fill in the IP address, Subnet mask, and Default gateway fields if you have a static IP address that was assigned to you by your network administrator or ISP. You may also have to enter a Preferred DNS server and an Alternate DNS server, if that information was provided. 7 Click OK to close the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window. 8 Click OK to close the Local Area Connection Properties window. Verifying Settings 1 Click Start > All Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt. 2 In the Command Prompt window, type "ipconfig" and then press [ENTER]. You can also go to Start > Control Panel > Network Connections, right-click a network connection, click Status and then click the Support tab to view your IP address and connection information. 250 NVG2053 Users Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address Windows Vista This section shows screens from Windows Vista Professional. 1 Click Start > Control Panel. 2 In the Control Panel, click the Network and Internet icon. 3 Click the Network and Sharing Center icon. NVG2053 Users Guide 251 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 4 Click Manage network connections. 5 Right-click Local Area Connection and then select Properties. Note: During this procedure, click Continue whenever Windows displays a screen saying that it needs your permission to continue. 252 NVG2053 Users Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 6 Select Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) and then select Properties. NVG2053 Users Guide 253 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 7 The Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties window opens. 8 Select Obtain an IP address automatically if your network administrator or ISP assigns your IP address dynamically. Select Use the following IP Address and fill in the IP address, Subnet mask, and Default gateway fields if you have a static IP address that was assigned to you by your network administrator or ISP. You may also have to enter a Preferred DNS server and an Alternate DNS server, if that information was provided.Click Advanced. 9 Click OK to close the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window. 10 Click OK to close the Local Area Connection Properties window. 254 NVG2053 Users Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address Verifying Settings 1 Click Start > All Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt. 2 In the Command Prompt window, type "ipconfig" and then press [ENTER]. You can also go to Start > Control Panel > Network Connections, right-click a network connection, click Status and then click the Support tab to view your IP address and connection information. Windows 7 This section shows screens from Windows 7 Enterprise. 1 Click Start > Control Panel. 2 In the Control Panel, click View network status and tasks under the Network and Internet category. NVG2053 Users Guide 255 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 3 Click Change adapter settings. 4 Double click Local Area Connection and then select Properties. Note: During this procedure, click Continue whenever Windows displays a screen saying that it needs your permission to continue. 256 NVG2053 Users Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 5 Select Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) and then select Properties. NVG2053 Users Guide 257 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 6 The Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties window opens. 7 Select Obtain an IP address automatically if your network administrator or ISP assigns your IP address dynamically. Select Use the following IP Address and fill in the IP address, Subnet mask, and Default gateway fields if you have a static IP address that was assigned to you by your network administrator or ISP. You may also have to enter a Preferred DNS server and an Alternate DNS server, if that information was provided. Click Advanced if you want to configure advanced settings for IP, DNS and WINS. 8 Click OK to close the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window. 9 Click OK to close the Local Area Connection Properties window. 258 NVG2053 Users Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address Verifying Settings 1 Click Start > All Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt. 2 3 In the Command Prompt window, type "ipconfig" and then press [ENTER]. The IP settings are displayed as follows. Mac OS X: 10.3 and 10.4 The screens in this section are from Mac OS X 10.4 but can also apply to 10.3. 1 Click Apple > System Preferences. NVG2053 Users Guide 259 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 2 In the System Preferences window, click the Network icon. 3 When the Network preferences pane opens, select Built-in Ethernet from the network connection type list, and then click Configure. 260 NVG2053 Users Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 4 For dynamically assigned settings, select Using DHCP from the Configure IPv4 list in the TCP/IP tab. 5 For statically assigned settings, do the following:
From the Configure IPv4 list, select Manually.
In the IP Address field, type your IP address.
In the Subnet Mask field, type your subnet mask.
In the Router field, type the IP address of your device. 6 Click Apply Now and close the window. NVG2053 Users Guide 261 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address Verifying Settings Check your TCP/IP properties by clicking Applications > Utilities > Network Utilities, and then selecting the appropriate Network Interface from the Info tab. Figure 112 Mac OS X 10.4: Network Utility Mac OS X: 10.5 and 10.6 The screens in this section are from Mac OS X 10.5 but can also apply to 10.6. 1 Click Apple > System Preferences. 262 NVG2053 Users Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 2 In System Preferences, click the Network icon. 3 When the Network preferences pane opens, select Ethernet from the list of available connection types. 4 From the Configure list, select Using DHCP for dynamically assigned settings. NVG2053 Users Guide 263 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 5 For statically assigned settings, do the following:
From the Configure list, select Manually.
In the IP Address field, enter your IP address.
In the Subnet Mask field, enter your subnet mask.
In the Router field, enter the IP address of your NVG2053. 6 Click Apply and close the window. 264 NVG2053 Users Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address Verifying Settings Check your TCP/IP properties by clicking Applications > Utilities > Network Utilities, and then selecting the appropriate Network interface from the Info tab. Figure 113 Mac OS X 10.5: Network Utility Linux: Ubuntu 8 (GNOME) This section shows you how to configure your computers TCP/IP settings in the GNU Object Model Environment (GNOME) using the Ubuntu 8 Linux distribution. The procedure, screens and file locations may vary depending on your specific distribution, release version, and individual configuration. The following screens use the default Ubuntu 8 installation. Note: Make sure you are logged in as the root administrator. NVG2053 Users Guide 265 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address Follow the steps below to configure your computer IP address in GNOME:
1 Click System > Administration > Network. 2 When the Network Settings window opens, click Unlock to open the Authenticate window. (By default, the Unlock button is greyed out until clicked.) You cannot make changes to your configuration unless you first enter your admin password. 266 NVG2053 Users Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 3 In the Authenticate window, enter your admin account name and password then click the Authenticate button. 4 In the Network Settings window, select the connection that you want to configure, then click Properties. NVG2053 Users Guide 267 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 5 The Properties dialog box opens.
In the Configuration list, select Automatic Configuration (DHCP) if you have a dynamic IP address.
In the Configuration list, select Static IP address if you have a static IP address. Fill in the IP address, Subnet mask, and Gateway address fields. 6 Click OK to save the changes and close the Properties dialog box and return to the Network Settings screen. 7 If you know your DNS server IP address(es), click the DNS tab in the Network Settings window and then enter the DNS server information in the fields provided. 8 Click the Close button to apply the changes. 268 NVG2053 Users Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address Verifying Settings Check your TCP/IP properties by clicking System > Administration > Network Tools, and then selecting the appropriate Network device from the Devices tab. The Interface Statistics column shows data if your connection is working properly. Figure 114 Ubuntu 8: Network Tools NVG2053 Users Guide 269 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address Linux: openSUSE 10.3 (KDE) This section shows you how to configure your computers TCP/IP settings in the K Desktop Environment (KDE) using the openSUSE 10.3 Linux distribution. The procedure, screens and file locations may vary depending on your specific distribution, release version, and individual configuration. The following screens use the default openSUSE 10.3 installation. Note: Make sure you are logged in as the root administrator. Follow the steps below to configure your computer IP address in the KDE:
1 Click K Menu > Computer > Administrator Settings (YaST). 2 When the Run as Root - KDE su dialog opens, enter the admin password and click OK. 270 NVG2053 Users Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 3 When the YaST Control Center window opens, select Network Devices and then click the Network Card icon. 4 When the Network Settings window opens, click the Overview tab, select the appropriate connection Name from the list, and then click the Configure button. NVG2053 Users Guide 271 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 5 When the Network Card Setup window opens, click the Address tab Figure 115 openSUSE 10.3: Network Card Setup 6 Select Dynamic Address (DHCP) if you have a dynamic IP address. Select Statically assigned IP Address if you have a static IP address. Fill in the IP address, Subnet mask, and Hostname fields. 7 Click Next to save the changes and close the Network Card Setup window. 272 NVG2053 Users Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 8 If you know your DNS server IP address(es), click the Hostname/DNS tab in Network Settings and then enter the DNS server information in the fields provided. 9 Click Finish to save your settings and close the window. Verifying Settings Click the KNetwork Manager icon on the Task bar to check your TCP/IP properties. From the Options sub-menu, select Show Connection Information. Figure 116 openSUSE 10.3: KNetwork Manager NVG2053 Users Guide 273 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address When the Connection Status - KNetwork Manager window opens, click the Statistics tab to see if your connection is working properly. Figure 117 openSUSE: Connection Status - KNetwork Manager 274 NVG2053 Users Guide APPENDIX C Wireless LANs Wireless LAN Topologies This section discusses ad-hoc and infrastructure wireless LAN topologies. Ad-hoc Wireless LAN Configuration The simplest WLAN configuration is an independent (Ad-hoc) WLAN that connects a set of computers with wireless adapters (A, B, C). Any time two or more wireless adapters are within range of each other, they can set up an independent network, which is commonly referred to as an ad-hoc network or Independent Basic Service Set (IBSS). The following diagram shows an example of notebook computers using wireless adapters to form an ad-hoc wireless LAN. Figure 118 Peer-to-Peer Communication in an Ad-hoc Network BSS A Basic Service Set (BSS) exists when all communications between wireless clients or between a wireless client and a wired network client go through one access point (AP). Intra-BSS traffic is traffic between wireless clients in the BSS. When Intra-BSS is enabled, wireless client A and B can access the wired network and communicate NVG2053 Users Guide 275 Appendix C Wireless LANs with each other. When Intra-BSS is disabled, wireless client A and B can still access the wired network but cannot communicate with each other. Figure 119 Basic Service Set ESS An Extended Service Set (ESS) consists of a series of overlapping BSSs, each containing an access point, with each access point connected together by a wired network. This wired connection between APs is called a Distribution System (DS). This type of wireless LAN topology is called an Infrastructure WLAN. The Access Points not only provide communication with the wired network but also mediate wireless network traffic in the immediate neighborhood. 276 NVG2053 Users Guide Appendix C Wireless LANs An ESSID (ESS IDentification) uniquely identifies each ESS. All access points and their associated wireless clients within the same ESS must have the same ESSID in order to communicate. Figure 120 Infrastructure WLAN Channel A channel is the radio frequency(ies) used by wireless devices to transmit and receive data. Channels available depend on your geographical area. You may have a choice of channels (for your region) so you should use a channel different from an adjacent AP (access point) to reduce interference. Interference occurs when radio signals from different access points overlap causing interference and degrading performance. Adjacent channels partially overlap however. To avoid interference due to overlap, your AP should be on a channel at least five channels away from a channel that an adjacent AP is using. For example, if your region has 11 channels and an adjacent AP is using channel 1, then you need to select a channel between 6 or 11. RTS/CTS A hidden node occurs when two stations are within range of the same access point, but are not within range of each other. The following figure illustrates a NVG2053 Users Guide 277 Appendix C Wireless LANs hidden node. Both stations (STA) are within range of the access point (AP) or wireless gateway, but out-of-range of each other, so they cannot "hear" each other, that is they do not know if the channel is currently being used. Therefore, they are considered hidden from each other. Figure 121 RTS/CTS When station A sends data to the AP, it might not know that the station B is already using the channel. If these two stations send data at the same time, collisions may occur when both sets of data arrive at the AP at the same time, resulting in a loss of messages for both stations. RTS/CTS is designed to prevent collisions due to hidden nodes. An RTS/CTS defines the biggest size data frame you can send before an RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake is invoked. When a data frame exceeds the RTS/CTS value you set (between 0 to 2432 bytes), the station that wants to transmit this frame must first send an RTS
(Request To Send) message to the AP for permission to send it. The AP then responds with a CTS (Clear to Send) message to all other stations within its range to notify them to defer their transmission. It also reserves and confirms with the requesting station the time frame for the requested transmission. Stations can send frames smaller than the specified RTS/CTS directly to the AP without the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake. You should only configure RTS/CTS if the possibility of hidden nodes exists on your network and the "cost" of resending large frames is more than the extra network overhead involved in the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake. If the RTS/CTS value is greater than the Fragmentation Threshold value (see next), then the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake will never occur as data frames will be fragmented before they reach RTS/CTS size. Note: Enabling the RTS Threshold causes redundant network overhead that could negatively affect the throughput performance instead of providing a remedy. 278 NVG2053 Users Guide Fragmentation Threshold Appendix C Wireless LANs A Fragmentation Threshold is the maximum data fragment size (between 256 and 2432 bytes) that can be sent in the wireless network before the AP will fragment the packet into smaller data frames. A large Fragmentation Threshold is recommended for networks not prone to interference while you should set a smaller threshold for busy networks or networks that are prone to interference. If the Fragmentation Threshold value is smaller than the RTS/CTS value (see previously) you set then the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake will never occur as data frames will be fragmented before they reach RTS/CTS size. Preamble Type Preamble is used to signal that data is coming to the receiver. Short and long refer to the length of the synchronization field in a packet. Short preamble increases performance as less time sending preamble means more time for sending data. All IEEE 802.11 compliant wireless adapters support long preamble, but not all support short preamble. Use long preamble if you are unsure what preamble mode other wireless devices on the network support, and to provide more reliable communications in busy wireless networks. Use short preamble if you are sure all wireless devices on the network support it, and to provide more efficient communications. Use the dynamic setting to automatically use short preamble when all wireless devices on the network support it, otherwise the NVG2053 uses long preamble. Note: The wireless devices MUST use the same preamble mode in order to communicate. IEEE 802.11g Wireless LAN IEEE 802.11g is fully compatible with the IEEE 802.11b standard. This means an IEEE 802.11b adapter can interface directly with an IEEE 802.11g access point
(and vice versa) at 11 Mbps or lower depending on range. IEEE 802.11g has NVG2053 Users Guide 279 Appendix C Wireless LANs several intermediate rate steps between the maximum and minimum data rates. The IEEE 802.11g data rate and modulation are as follows:
Table 80 IEEE 802.11g DATA RATE
(MBPS) 1 2 5.5 / 11 6/9/12/18/24/36/
48/54 MODULATION DBPSK (Differential Binary Phase Shift Keyed) DQPSK (Differential Quadrature Phase Shift Keying) CCK (Complementary Code Keying) OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing) Wireless Security Overview Wireless security is vital to your network to protect wireless communication between wireless clients, access points and the wired network. Wireless security methods available on the NVG2053 are data encryption, wireless client authentication, restricting access by device MAC address and hiding the NVG2053 identity. The following figure shows the relative effectiveness of these wireless security methods available on your NVG2053. Table 81 Wireless Security Levels SECURITY LEVEL Least Secure SECURITY TYPE Unique SSID (Default) Unique SSID with Hide SSID Enabled MAC Address Filtering WEP Encryption IEEE802.1x EAP with RADIUS Server Authentication Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) WPA2 Most Secure Note: You must enable the same wireless security settings on the NVG2053 and on all wireless clients that you want to associate with it. 280 NVG2053 Users Guide Appendix C Wireless LANs IEEE 802.1x In June 2001, the IEEE 802.1x standard was designed to extend the features of IEEE 802.11 to support extended authentication as well as providing additional accounting and control features. It is supported by Windows XP and a number of network devices. Some advantages of IEEE 802.1x are:
User based identification that allows for roaming.
Support for RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial In User Service, RFC 2138, 2139) for centralized user profile and accounting management on a network RADIUS server.
Support for EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol, RFC 2486) that allows additional authentication methods to be deployed with no changes to the access point or the wireless clients. RADIUS RADIUS is based on a client-server model that supports authentication, authorization and accounting. The access point is the client and the server is the RADIUS server. The RADIUS server handles the following tasks:
Authentication Determines the identity of the users.
Authorization Determines the network services available to authenticated users once they are connected to the network.
Accounting Keeps track of the clients network activity. RADIUS is a simple package exchange in which your AP acts as a message relay between the wireless client and the network RADIUS server. Types of RADIUS Messages The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS server for user authentication:
Access-Request Sent by an access point requesting authentication.
Access-Reject Sent by a RADIUS server rejecting access.
Access-Accept Sent by a RADIUS server allowing access. NVG2053 Users Guide 281 Appendix C Wireless LANs
Access-Challenge Sent by a RADIUS server requesting more information in order to allow access. The access point sends a proper response from the user and then sends another Access-Request message. The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS server for user accounting:
Accounting-Request Sent by the access point requesting accounting.
Accounting-Response Sent by the RADIUS server to indicate that it has started or stopped accounting. In order to ensure network security, the access point and the RADIUS server use a shared secret key, which is a password, they both know. The key is not sent over the network. In addition to the shared key, password information exchanged is also encrypted to protect the network from unauthorized access. Types of EAP Authentication This section discusses some popular authentication types: EAP-MD5, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, PEAP and LEAP. Your wireless LAN device may not support all authentication types. EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) is an authentication protocol that runs on top of the IEEE 802.1x transport mechanism in order to support multiple types of user authentication. By using EAP to interact with an EAP-compatible RADIUS server, an access point helps a wireless station and a RADIUS server perform authentication. The type of authentication you use depends on the RADIUS server and an intermediary AP(s) that supports IEEE 802.1x. For EAP-TLS authentication type, you must first have a wired connection to the network and obtain the certificate(s) from a certificate authority (CA). A certificate
(also called digital IDs) can be used to authenticate users and a CA issues certificates and guarantees the identity of each certificate owner. EAP-MD5 (Message-Digest Algorithm 5) MD5 authentication is the simplest one-way authentication method. The authentication server sends a challenge to the wireless client. The wireless client proves that it knows the password by encrypting the password with the challenge and sends back the information. Password is not sent in plain text. 282 NVG2053 Users Guide Appendix C Wireless LANs However, MD5 authentication has some weaknesses. Since the authentication server needs to get the plaintext passwords, the passwords must be stored. Thus someone other than the authentication server may access the password file. In addition, it is possible to impersonate an authentication server as MD5 authentication method does not perform mutual authentication. Finally, MD5 authentication method does not support data encryption with dynamic session key. You must configure WEP encryption keys for data encryption. EAP-TLS (Transport Layer Security) With EAP-TLS, digital certifications are needed by both the server and the wireless clients for mutual authentication. The server presents a certificate to the client. After validating the identity of the server, the client sends a different certificate to the server. The exchange of certificates is done in the open before a secured tunnel is created. This makes user identity vulnerable to passive attacks. A digital certificate is an electronic ID card that authenticates the senders identity. However, to implement EAP-TLS, you need a Certificate Authority (CA) to handle certificates, which imposes a management overhead. EAP-TTLS (Tunneled Transport Layer Service) EAP-TTLS is an extension of the EAP-TLS authentication that uses certificates for only the server-side authentications to establish a secure connection. Client authentication is then done by sending username and password through the secure connection, thus client identity is protected. For client authentication, EAP-
TTLS supports EAP methods and legacy authentication methods such as PAP, CHAP, MS-CHAP and MS-CHAP v2. PEAP (Protected EAP) Like EAP-TTLS, server-side certificate authentication is used to establish a secure connection, then use simple username and password methods through the secured connection to authenticate the clients, thus hiding client identity. However, PEAP only supports EAP methods, such as EAP-MD5, EAP-MSCHAPv2 and EAP-GTC (EAP-Generic Token Card), for client authentication. EAP-GTC is implemented only by Cisco. LEAP LEAP (Lightweight Extensible Authentication Protocol) is a Cisco implementation of IEEE 802.1x. NVG2053 Users Guide 283 Appendix C Wireless LANs Dynamic WEP Key Exchange The AP maps a unique key that is generated with the RADIUS server. This key expires when the wireless connection times out, disconnects or reauthentication times out. A new WEP key is generated each time reauthentication is performed. If this feature is enabled, it is not necessary to configure a default encryption key in the wireless security configuration screen. You may still configure and store keys, but they will not be used while dynamic WEP is enabled. Note: EAP-MD5 cannot be used with Dynamic WEP Key Exchange For added security, certificate-based authentications (EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS and PEAP) use dynamic keys for data encryption. They are often deployed in corporate environments, but for public deployment, a simple user name and password pair is more practical. The following table is a comparison of the features of authentication types. Table 82 Comparison of EAP Authentication Types Mutual Authentication Certificate Client Certificate Server Dynamic Key Exchange Credential Integrity Deployment Difficulty Client Identity Protection EAP-MD5 No No No No None Easy No EAP-TLS EAP-TTLS Yes Yes Yes Yes Strong Hard No Yes Optional Yes Yes Strong Moderate Yes LEAP PEAP Yes Yes No Optional No Yes Yes Yes Strong Moderate Moderate Moderate Yes No WPA and WPA2 Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a subset of the IEEE 802.11i standard. WPA2
(IEEE 802.11i) is a wireless security standard that defines stronger encryption, authentication and key management than WPA. Key differences between WPA or WPA2 and WEP are improved data encryption and user authentication. If both an AP and the wireless clients support WPA2 and you have an external RADIUS server, use WPA2 for stronger data encryption. If you don't have an external RADIUS server, you should use WPA2-PSK (WPA2-Pre-Shared Key) that only requires a single (identical) password entered into each access point, wireless gateway and wireless client. As long as the passwords match, a wireless client will be granted access to a WLAN. 284 NVG2053 Users Guide Appendix C Wireless LANs If the AP or the wireless clients do not support WPA2, just use WPA or WPA-PSK depending on whether you have an external RADIUS server or not. Select WEP only when the AP and/or wireless clients do not support WPA or WPA2. WEP is less secure than WPA or WPA2. Encryption WPA improves data encryption by using Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP), Message Integrity Check (MIC) and IEEE 802.1x. WPA2 also uses TKIP when required for compatibility reasons, but offers stronger encryption than TKIP with Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) in the Counter mode with Cipher block chaining Message authentication code Protocol (CCMP). TKIP uses 128-bit keys that are dynamically generated and distributed by the authentication server. AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) is a block cipher that uses a 256-bit mathematical algorithm called Rijndael. They both include a per-
packet key mixing function, a Message Integrity Check (MIC) named Michael, an extended initialization vector (IV) with sequencing rules, and a re-keying mechanism. WPA and WPA2 regularly change and rotate the encryption keys so that the same encryption key is never used twice. The RADIUS server distributes a Pairwise Master Key (PMK) key to the AP that then sets up a key hierarchy and management system, using the PMK to dynamically generate unique data encryption keys to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless clients. This all happens in the background automatically. The Message Integrity Check (MIC) is designed to prevent an attacker from capturing data packets, altering them and resending them. The MIC provides a strong mathematical function in which the receiver and the transmitter each compute and then compare the MIC. If they do not match, it is assumed that the data has been tampered with and the packet is dropped. By generating unique data encryption keys for every data packet and by creating an integrity checking mechanism (MIC), with TKIP and AES it is more difficult to decrypt data on a Wi-Fi network than WEP and difficult for an intruder to break into the network. The encryption mechanisms used for WPA(2) and WPA(2)-PSK are the same. The only difference between the two is that WPA(2)-PSK uses a simple common password, instead of user-specific credentials. The common-password approach makes WPA(2)-PSK susceptible to brute-force password-guessing attacks but its still an improvement over WEP as it employs a consistent, single, alphanumeric password to derive a PMK which is used to generate unique temporal encryption NVG2053 Users Guide 285 Appendix C Wireless LANs keys. This prevent all wireless devices sharing the same encryption keys. (a weakness of WEP) User Authentication WPA and WPA2 apply IEEE 802.1x and Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) to authenticate wireless clients using an external RADIUS database. WPA2 reduces the number of key exchange messages from six to four (CCMP 4-way handshake) and shortens the time required to connect to a network. Other WPA2 authentication features that are different from WPA include key caching and pre-
authentication. These two features are optional and may not be supported in all wireless devices. Key caching allows a wireless client to store the PMK it derived through a successful authentication with an AP. The wireless client uses the PMK when it tries to connect to the same AP and does not need to go with the authentication process again. Pre-authentication enables fast roaming by allowing the wireless client (already connecting to an AP) to perform IEEE 802.1x authentication with another AP before connecting to it. Wireless Client WPA Supplicants A wireless client supplicant is the software that runs on an operating system instructing the wireless client how to use WPA. At the time of writing, the most widely available supplicant is the WPA patch for Windows XP, Funk Software's Odyssey client. The Windows XP patch is a free download that adds WPA capability to Windows XP's built-in "Zero Configuration" wireless client. However, you must run Windows XP to use it. WPA(2) with RADIUS Application Example To set up WPA(2), you need the IP address of the RADIUS server, its port number
(default is 1812), and the RADIUS shared secret. A WPA(2) application example with an external RADIUS server looks as follows. "A" is the RADIUS server. "DS" is the distribution system. 1 2 The AP passes the wireless client's authentication request to the RADIUS server. The RADIUS server then checks the user's identification against its database and grants or denies network access accordingly. 3 A 256-bit Pairwise Master Key (PMK) is derived from the authentication process by the RADIUS server and the client. 286 NVG2053 Users Guide Appendix C Wireless LANs 4 The RADIUS server distributes the PMK to the AP. The AP then sets up a key hierarchy and management system, using the PMK to dynamically generate unique data encryption keys. The keys are used to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless clients. Figure 122 WPA(2) with RADIUS Application Example WPA(2)-PSK Application Example A WPA(2)-PSK application looks as follows. 1 2 3 First enter identical passwords into the AP and all wireless clients. The Pre-Shared Key (PSK) must consist of between 8 and 63 ASCII characters or 64 hexadecimal characters (including spaces and symbols). The AP checks each wireless client's password and allows it to join the network only if the password matches. The AP and wireless clients generate a common PMK (Pairwise Master Key). The key itself is not sent over the network, but is derived from the PSK and the SSID. NVG2053 Users Guide 287 Appendix C Wireless LANs 4 The AP and wireless clients use the TKIP or AES encryption process, the PMK and information exchanged in a handshake to create temporal encryption keys. They use these keys to encrypt data exchanged between them. Figure 123 WPA(2)-PSK Authentication Security Parameters Summary Refer to this table to see what other security parameters you should configure for each authentication method or key management protocol type. MAC address filters are not dependent on how you configure these security features. Table 83 Wireless Security Relational Matrix AUTHENTICATION METHOD/ KEY MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL Open ENCRYPTIO N METHOD None No ENTER MANUAL KEY IEEE 802.1X Open WEP Shared WEP No Yes Yes No Yes WPA WPA-PSK WPA2 WPA2-PSK TKIP/AES TKIP/AES TKIP/AES TKIP/AES Yes No Yes No Yes 288 Disable Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Enable with Dynamic WEP Key Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Disable Enable with Dynamic WEP Key Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable NVG2053 Users Guide Appendix C Wireless LANs Antenna Overview An antenna couples RF signals onto air. A transmitter within a wireless device sends an RF signal to the antenna, which propagates the signal through the air. The antenna also operates in reverse by capturing RF signals from the air. Positioning the antennas properly increases the range and coverage area of a wireless LAN. Antenna Characteristics Frequency An antenna in the frequency of 2.4GHz (IEEE 802.11b and IEEE 802.11g) or 5GHz
(IEEE 802.11a) is needed to communicate efficiently in a wireless LAN Radiation Pattern A radiation pattern is a diagram that allows you to visualize the shape of the antennas coverage area. Antenna Gain Antenna gain, measured in dB (decibel), is the increase in coverage within the RF beam width. Higher antenna gain improves the range of the signal for better communications. For an indoor site, each 1 dB increase in antenna gain results in a range increase of approximately 2.5%. For an unobstructed outdoor site, each 1dB increase in gain results in a range increase of approximately 5%. Actual results may vary depending on the network environment. Antenna gain is sometimes specified in dBi, which is how much the antenna increases the signal power compared to using an isotropic antenna. An isotropic antenna is a theoretical perfect antenna that sends out radio signals equally well in all directions. dBi represents the true gain that the antenna provides. Types of Antennas for WLAN There are two types of antennas used for wireless LAN applications. NVG2053 Users Guide 289 Appendix C Wireless LANs
Omni-directional antennas send the RF signal out in all directions on a horizontal plane. The coverage area is torus-shaped (like a donut) which makes these antennas ideal for a room environment. With a wide coverage area, it is possible to make circular overlapping coverage areas with multiple access points.
Directional antennas concentrate the RF signal in a beam, like a flashlight does with the light from its bulb. The angle of the beam determines the width of the coverage pattern. Angles typically range from 20 degrees (very directional) to 120 degrees (less directional). Directional antennas are ideal for hallways and outdoor point-to-point applications. Positioning Antennas In general, antennas should be mounted as high as practically possible and free of obstructions. In point-topoint application, position both antennas at the same height and in a direct line of sight to each other to attain the best performance. For omni-directional antennas mounted on a table, desk, and so on, point the antenna up. For omni-directional antennas mounted on a wall or ceiling, point the antenna down. For a single AP application, place omni-directional antennas as close to the center of the coverage area as possible. For directional antennas, point the antenna in the direction of the desired coverage area. 290 NVG2053 Users Guide APPENDIX D Legal Information Copyright Copyright 2011 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation. The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, translated into any language, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical, photocopying, manual, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation. Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation. All rights reserved. Disclaimer ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products, or software described herein. Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others. ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein without notice. This publication is subject to change without notice. Your use of the NVG2053 is subject to the terms and conditions of any related service providers. Certifications Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Interference Statement The device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
This device may not cause harmful interference.
This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operations. This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to NVG2053 Users Guide 291 Appendix D Legal Information provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This device generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this device does cause harmful interference to radio/television reception, which can be determined by turning the device off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
1 Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. 2 Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver. 3 Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. 4 Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. FCC Radiation Exposure Statement
This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
IEEE 802.11b or 802.11g operation of this product in the U.S.A. is firmware-
limited to channels 1 through 11.
To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. Industry Canada Statement This device complies with RSS-210 of the Industry Canada Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1) this device may not cause interference and 2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device This device has been designed to operate with an antenna having a maximum gain of 2dBi. Antenna having a higher gain is strictly prohibited per regulations of Industry Canada. The required antenna impedance is 50 ohms. 292 NVG2053 Users Guide Appendix D Legal Information To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the EIRP is not more than required for successful communication. IMPORTANT NOTE Device for the band 5150-5250 MHz is only for indoor usage to reduce potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems; users should also be cautioned to take note that high-power radars are allocated as primary users
(meaning they have priority) of the bands 5250-5350 MHz and 5650-5850 MHz and these radars could cause interference and/or damage to LE-LAN devices. IC Radiation Exposure Statement:
This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20cm between the radiator & your body.
Notices Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. This device has been designed for the WLAN 2.4 GHz network throughout the EC region and Switzerland, with restrictions in France. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Cet appareil numrique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB-003 du Canada. NVG2053 Users Guide 293 Appendix D Legal Information Viewing Certifications 1 Go to http://www.zyxel.com. 2 Select your product on the ZyXEL home page to go to that product's page. 3 Select the certification you wish to view from this page. ZyXEL Limited Warranty ZyXEL warrants to the original end user (purchaser) that this product is free from any defects in materials or workmanship for a period of up to two years from the date of purchase. During the warranty period, and upon proof of purchase, should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and/or materials, ZyXEL will, at its discretion, repair or replace the defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor, and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper operating condition. Any replacement will consist of a new or re-manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal or higher value, and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL. This warranty shall not apply if the product has been modified, misused, tampered with, damaged by an act of God, or subjected to abnormal working conditions. Note Repair or replacement, as provided under this warranty, is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser. This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, express or implied, including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose. ZyXEL shall in no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser. To obtain the services of this warranty, contact your vendor. You may also refer to the warranty policy for the region in which you bought the device at http://
www.zyxel.com/web/support_warranty_info.php. Registration Register your product online to receive e-mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at www.zyxel.com for global products, or at www.us.zyxel.com for North American products. 294 NVG2053 Users Guide APPENDIX E Open Software Announcements End-User License Agreement for "NVG2053"
WARNING: ZyXEL Communications Corp. IS WILLING TO LICENSE THE SOFTWARE TO YOU ONLY UPON THE CONDITION THAT YOU ACCEPT ALL OF THE TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT. PLEASE READ THE TERMS CAREFULLY BEFORE COMPLETING THE INSTALLATION PROCESS AS INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE WILL INDICATE YOUR ASSENT TO THEM. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THESE TERMS, THEN ZyXEL IS UNWILLING TO LICENSE THE SOFTWARE TO YOU, IN WHICH EVENT YOU SHOULD RETURN THE UNINSTALLED SOFTWARE AND PACKAGING TO THE PLACE FROM WHICH IT WAS ACQUIRED OR ZyXEL, AND YOUR MONEY WILL BE REFUNDED. HOWEVER, CERTAIN ZYXEL'S PRODUCTS MAY CONTAIN-IN PART-SOME THIRD PARTY'S FREE AND OPEN SOFTWARE PROGRAMS WHICH ALLOW YOU TO FREELY COPY, RUN, DISTRIBUTE, MODIFY AND IMPROVE THE SOFTWARE UNDER THE APPLICABLE TERMS OF SUCH THRID PARTY'S LICENSES
("OPEN-SOURCED COMPONENTS"). THE OPEN-SOURCED COMPONENTS ARE LISTED IN THE NOTICE OR APPENDIX BELOW. ZYXEL MAY HAVE DISTRIBUTED TO YOU HARDWARE AND/OR SOFTWARE, OR MADE AVAILABLE FOR ELECTRONIC DOWNLOADS THESE FREE SOFTWARE PROGRAMS OF THRID PARTIES AND YOU ARE LICENSED TO FREELY COPY, MODIFY AND REDISTIBUTE THAT SOFTWARE UNDER THE APPLICABLE LICENSE TERMS OF SUCH THIRD PARTY. NONE OF THE STATEMENTS OR DOCUMENTATION FROM ZYXEL INCLUDING ANY RESTRICTIONS OR CONDITIONS STATED IN THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT SHALL RESTRICT ANY RIGHTS AND LICENSES YOU MAY HAVE WITH RESPECT TO THE OPEN-
SOURCED COMPONENTS UNDER THE APPLICABLE LICENSE TERMS OF SUCH THIRD PARTY. 1 Grant of License for Personal Use NVG2053 Users Guide 295 Appendix E Open Software Announcements ZyXEL Communications Corp. ("ZyXEL") grants you a non-exclusive, non-
sublicense, non-transferable license to use the program with which this license is distributed (the "Software"), including any documentation files accompanying the Software ("Documentation"), for internal business use only, for up to the number of users specified in sales order and invoice. You have the right to make one backup copy of the Software and Documentation solely for archival, back-up or disaster recovery purposes. You shall not exceed the scope of the license granted hereunder. Any rights not expressly granted by ZyXEL to you are reserved by ZyXEL, and all implied licenses are disclaimed. 2 Ownership You have no ownership rights in the Software. Rather, you have a license to use the Software as long as this License Agreement remains in full force and effect. Ownership of the Software, Documentation and all intellectual property rights therein shall remain at all times with ZyXEL. Any other use of the Software by any other entity is strictly forbidden and is a violation of this License Agreement. 3 Copyright The Software and Documentation contain material that is protected by international copyright law, trade secret law, international treaty provisions, and the applicable national laws of each respective country. All rights not granted to you herein are expressly reserved by ZyXEL. You may not remove any proprietary notice of ZyXEL or any of its licensors from any copy of the Software or Documentation. 4 Restrictions You may not publish, display, disclose, sell, rent, lease, modify, store, loan, distribute, or create derivative works of the Software, or any part thereof. You may not assign, sublicense, convey or otherwise transfer, pledge as security or otherwise encumber the rights and licenses granted hereunder with respect to the Software. ZyXEL is not obligated to provide any maintenance, technical or other support for the resultant modified Software. You may not copy, reverse engineer, decompile, reverse compile, translate, adapt, or disassemble the Software, or any part thereof, nor shall you attempt to create the source code from the object code for the Software. Except as and only to the extent expressly permitted in this License, you may not market, co-brand, and private label or otherwise permit third parties to link to the Software, or any part thereof. You may not use the Software, or any part thereof, in the operation of a service bureau or for the benefit of any other person or entity. You may not cause, assist or permit any third party to do any of the foregoing. Portions of the Software utilize or include third party software and other copyright material. Acknowledgements, licensing terms and disclaimers for such material are contained in the License Notice as below for the third party software, and your use of such material is exclusively governed by their respective terms. ZyXEL has provided, as part of the Software 296 NVG2053 Users Guide Appendix E Open Software Announcements package, access to certain third party software as a convenience. To the extent that the Software contains third party software, ZyXEL has no express or implied obligation to provide any technical or other support for such software other than compliance with the applicable license terms of such third party, and makes no warranty (express, implied or statutory) whatsoever with respect thereto. Please contact the appropriate software vendor or manufacturer directly for technical support and customer service related to its software and products. 5 Confidentiality You acknowledge that the Software contains proprietary trade secrets of ZyXEL and you hereby agree to maintain the confidentiality of the Software using at least as great a degree of care as you use to maintain the confidentiality of your own most confidential information. You agree to reasonably communicate the terms and conditions of this License Agreement to those persons employed by you who come into contact with the Software, and to use reasonable best efforts to ensure their compliance with such terms and conditions, including, without limitation, not knowingly permitting such persons to use any portion of the Software for the purpose of deriving the source code of the Software. 6 No Warranty THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS." TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, ZyXEL DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-
INFRINGEMENT. ZyXEL DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET ANY REQUIREMENTS OR NEEDS YOU MAY HAVE, OR THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL OPERATE ERROR FREE, OR IN AN UNINTERUPTED FASHION, OR THAT ANY DEFECTS OR ERRORS IN THE SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECTED, OR THAT THE SOFTWARE IS COMPATIBLE WITH ANY PARTICULAR PLATFORM. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE WAIVER OR EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES SO THEY MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. IF THIS EXCLUSION IS HELD TO BE UNENFORCEABLE BY A COURT OF COMPETENT JURISDICTION, THEN ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES SHALL BE LIMITED IN DURATION TO A PERIOD OF THIRTY (30) DAYS FROM THE DATE OF PURCHASE OF THE SOFTWARE, AND NO WARRANTIES SHALL APPLY AFTER THAT PERIOD. 7 Limitation of Liability IN NO EVENT WILL ZyXEL BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, PUNITIVE, OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, OR LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION) ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE OR PROGRAM, OR FOR ANY CLAIM BY ANY OTHER PARTY, EVEN IF ZyXEL HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. ZyXEL's NVG2053 Users Guide 297 Appendix E Open Software Announcements TOTAL AGGREGATE LIABILITY WITH RESPECT TO ITS OBLIGATIONS UNDER THIS AGREEMENT OR OTHERWISE WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION OR OTHERWISE SHALL BE EQUAL TO THE PURCHASE PRICE, BUT SHALL IN NO EVENT EXCEED THE PRODUCT'S PRICE. BECAUSE SOME STATES/COUNTRIES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. 8 Export Restrictions THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT IS EXPRESSLY MADE SUBJECT TO ANY APPLICABLE LAWS, REGULATIONS, ORDERS, OR OTHER RESTRICTIONS ON THE EXPORT OF THE SOFTWARE OR INFORMATION ABOUT SUCH SOFTWARE WHICH MAY BE IMPOSED FROM TIME TO TIME. YOU SHALL NOT EXPORT THE SOFTWARE, DOCUMENTATION OR INFORMATION ABOUT THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION WITHOUT COMPLYING WITH SUCH LAWS, REGULATIONS, ORDERS, OR OTHER RESTRICTIONS. YOU AGREE TO INDEMNIFY ZyXEL AGAINST ALL CLAIMS, LOSSES, DAMAGES, LIABILITIES, COSTS AND EXPENSES, INCLUDING REASONABLE ATTORNEYS' FEES, TO THE EXTENT SUCH CLAIMS ARISE OUT OF ANY BREACH OF THIS SECTION 8. 9 Audit Rights ZyXEL SHALL HAVE THE RIGHT, AT ITS OWN EXPENSE, UPON REASONABLE PRIOR NOTICE, TO PERIODICALLY INSPECT AND AUDIT YOUR RECORDS TO ENSURE YOUR COMPLIANCE WITH THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT. 10 Termination This License Agreement is effective until it is terminated. You may terminate this License Agreement at any time by destroying or returning to ZyXEL all copies of the Software and Documentation in your possession or under your control. ZyXEL may terminate this License Agreement for any reason, including, but not limited to, if ZyXEL finds that you have violated any of the terms of this License Agreement. Upon notification of termination, you agree to destroy or return to ZyXEL all copies of the Software and Documentation and to certify in writing that all known copies, including backup copies, have been destroyed. All provisions relating to confidentiality, proprietary rights, and non-disclosure shall survive the termination of this Software License Agreement. 11 General This License Agreement shall be construed, interpreted and governed by the laws of Republic of China without regard to conflicts of laws provisions thereof. The exclusive forum for any disputes arising out of or relating to this License Agreement shall be an appropriate court or Commercial Arbitration Association 298 NVG2053 Users Guide Appendix E Open Software Announcements sitting in ROC, Taiwan if the parties agree to a binding arbitration. This License Agreement shall constitute the entire Agreement between the parties hereto. This License Agreement, the rights granted hereunder, the Software and Documentation shall not be assigned by you without the prior written consent of ZyXEL. Any waiver or modification of this License Agreement shall only be effective if it is in writing and signed by both parties hereto. If any part of this License Agreement is found invalid or unenforceable by a court of competent jurisdiction, the remainder of this License Agreement shall be interpreted so as to reasonably effect the intention of the parties. Note: Some components of this product incorporate free software programs covered under the open source code licenses which allows you to freely copy, modify and redistribute the software. For at least three (3) years from the date of distribution of the applicable product or software, we will give to anyone who contacts us at the ZyXEL Technical Support (support@zyxel.com.tw), for a charge of no more than our cost of physically performing source code distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the complete corresponding source code for the version of the Programs that we distributed to you if we are in possession of such. Notice Information herein is subject to change without notice. Companies, names, and data used in examples herein are fictitious unless otherwise noted. No part may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, for any purpose, except the express written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation. This Product includes alsa, aodv-uu, binutils , br2684ctl, busybox, comgt, conntrack-tools, cyclesoak, PJSIP, hostapd, iptables, libtool, net-tools, ntfs-3g, ntpclient, ppp, wireless-tools and usbutils software under GPL 2.0 license. GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2, June 1991 Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This General Public License applies to most of the NVG2053 Users Guide 299 Appendix E Open Software Announcements Free Software Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Library General Public License instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too. When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things. To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it. For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights. We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software. Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors' reputations. Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all. The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below, refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program" means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into 300 NVG2053 Users Guide Appendix E Open Software Announcements another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you". Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program (independent of having been made by running the Program). Whether that is true depends on what the Program does. 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty;
keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program. You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee. 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License. c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause it, when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement.) These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it. Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you;
rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or NVG2053 Users Guide 301 Appendix E Open Software Announcements collective works based on the Program. In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License. 3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:
a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code.
(This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.) The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a special exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components
(compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable. If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code. 4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance. 5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any work 302 NVG2053 Users Guide Appendix E Open Software Announcements based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it. 6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License. 7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you
(whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program. If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances. It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice. This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License. 8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License. 9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that NVG2053 Users Guide 303 Appendix E Open Software Announcements version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation. 10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally. NO WARRANTY 11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/
OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. 12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS All other trademarks or trade names mentioned herein, if any, are the property of their respective owners. This Product includes appweb software under below license. 304 NVG2053 Users Guide Appendix E Open Software Announcements Appweb Licensing Overview This page helps explain what are the requirements of the Appweb Open Source License. This page is a guide only, please consult the actual license for the governing terms. If you have questions, please read the licensing FAQ or contact us at:
licensing@embedthis.com Open Source License Appweb is provided under the GNU open source license which is governed by the provisions of the GPL license. If you are licensing your software or product under the GPL, or if you are a non-profit or educational institution, the GPL license should be able to meet your needs. If you are a commercial entity and do not want to use the GPL for your product, the GPL license may be used for evaluation purposes within your company. For other commercial uses, we recommend a Commercial License. If you require a commercial license or commercial support for Appweb, see Commercial License below or consult Embedthis Software. When to Use the GPL The Appweb GPL license is ideal for internal use, evaluation and some cases of stand-alone use. If your software is 100% GPL or is licensed under an acceptable Open Source License that is OSI approved and GPL compatible, you may use Appweb and embed them in your applications or devices. You do not need any other agreement or license - the GPL is all you need. Obligations of the GPL If you use the Appweb open source license, you abide by all the provisions of the GPL. These include (among other provisions) that if you redistribute your software and include Appweb software within your application, you must provide your complete source code to all on a non-discriminatory basis. Note that under the GPL license, you may develop, evaluate and embed Embedthis software in your application or product provided it is not redistributed either internally or externally. You may copy and modify the source code provided all copies fall under the GPL license. Please read the full GPL License for full details. Commercial License If your application is linked with Appweb and it is not provided to your customers under an acceptable open source license and you wish to redistribute your NVG2053 Users Guide 305 Appendix E Open Software Announcements application, then you will need a commercial license. There are also several good reasons to use a commercial license:
You want the ability to redistribute your product including Appweb
You do not want to provide the source code to your application
You need a warranty on the software from Embedthis
You do not want to run the risk of your organization's software falling under the governing terms of the GPL
You want support
You want priority notification of security issues and emergency patches The Embedthis Commercial license is such a commercial license. Redistribution You may also redistribute Embedthis products if you only use them in a stand-
alone fashion as freestanding binaries without embedding them in your application. These redistributed copies remain under the GPL license. This software is supplied under license. Both a GNU and commercial license are available. Please read LICENSE.TXT for details. This documentation and the software described in this document may be used and copied only in accordance with the terms of the accompanying license agreement. Product and technical information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of Mbedthis Software LLC. Copyright (c) Mbedthis Software LLC, 2003-2007. All Rights Reserved. Mbedthis is a trademark of Mbedthis Software LLC. Mbedthis, Appweb, ESP and EGI are trademarks of Mbedthis Software. All other brand or product names are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders. Mbedthis Software, LLC. 4616 25th Ave NE
#733 Seattle, WA 98105.
+1 (425) 329-3490 www.mbedthis.com info@mbedthis.com This Product includes dropbear software under below license. 306 NVG2053 Users Guide Appendix E Open Software Announcements Dropbear contains a number of components from different sources, hence there are a few licenses and authors involved. All licenses are fairly non-restrictive. The majority of code is written by Matt Johnston, under the license below. Portions of the client-mode work are (c) 2004 Mihnea Stoenescu, under the same license:
Copyright (c) 2002-2006 Matt Johnston Portions copyright (c) 2004 Mihnea Stoenescu All rights reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
LibTomCrypt and LibTomMath are written by Tom St Denis, and are Public Domain.
sshpty.c is taken from OpenSSH 3.5p1, Copyright (c) 1995 Tatu Ylonen <ylo@cs.hut.fi>, Espoo, Finland All rights reserved
"As far as I am concerned, the code I have written for this software can be used freely for any purpose. Any derived versions of this software must be clearly marked as such, and if the derived work is incompatible with the protocol NVG2053 Users Guide 307 Appendix E Open Software Announcements description in the RFC file, it must be called by a name other than "ssh" or "Secure Shell". "
loginrec.c loginrec.h atomicio.h atomicio.c and strlcat() (included in util.c) are from OpenSSH 3.6.1p2, and are licensed under the 2 point BSD license. loginrec is written primarily by Andre Lucas, atomicio.c by Theo de Raadt. strlcat() is (c) Todd C. Miller
Import code in keyimport.c is modified from PuTTY's import.c, licensed as follows:
PuTTY is copyright 1997-2003 Simon Tatham. Portions copyright Robert de Bath, Joris van Rantwijk, Delian Delchev, Andreas Schultz, Jeroen Massar, Wez Furlong, Nicolas Barry, Justin Bradford, and CORE SDI S.A. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. This Product includes iperf software under below license. Iperf Copyright 308 NVG2053 Users Guide Appendix E Open Software Announcements ________________________________________ Copyright (c) 1999,2000,2001,2002,2003,2004,2005 The Board of Trustees of the University of Illinois All Rights Reserved. Iperf performance test Mark Gates Ajay Tirumala Jim Ferguson Jon Dugan Feng Qin Kevin Gibbs John Estabrook National Laboratory for Applied Network Research National Center for Supercomputing Applications University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign http://www.ncsa.uiuc.edu Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software (Iperf) and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
"Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimers.
"Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimers in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
"Neither the names of the University of Illinois, NCSA, nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this Software without specific prior written permission. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE CONTIBUTORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. NVG2053 Users Guide 309 Appendix E Open Software Announcements This Product includes libcli and libusb software under LGPL license. GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2.1, February 1999 Copyright (C) 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
[This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts as the successor of the GNU Library Public License, version 2, hence the version number 2.1.]
Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to some specially designated software packages--typically libraries--of the Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it. You can use it too, but we suggest you first think carefully about whether this license or the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy to use in any particular case, based on the explanations below. When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish); that you receive source code or can get it if you want it; that you can change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you are informed that you can do these things. To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender these rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it. For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave you. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. If you link other code with the 310 NVG2053 Users Guide Appendix E Open Software Announcements library, you must provide complete object files to the recipients, so that they can relink them with the library after making changes to the library and recompiling it. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights. We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the library, and
(2) we offer you this license, which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library. To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for the free library. Also, if the library is modified by someone else and passed on, the recipients should know that what they have is not the original version, so that the original author's reputation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced by others. Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program. We wish to make sure that a company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder. Therefore, we insist that any patent license obtained for a version of the library must be consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license. Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License. This license, the GNU Lesser General Public License, applies to certain designated libraries, and is quite different from the ordinary General Public License. We use this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into non-free programs. When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or using a shared library, the combination of the two is legally speaking a combined work, a derivative of the original library. The ordinary General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom. The Lesser General Public License permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the library. We call this license the "Lesser" General Public License because it does Less to protect the user's freedom than the ordinary General Public License. It also provides other free software developers Less of an advantage over competing non-free programs. These disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries. However, the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special circumstances. For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible use of a certain library, so that it becomes a de-facto standard. To achieve this, non-free programs must be allowed to use the library. A more frequent case is that a free library does the same job as widely used non-free libraries. In this case, there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free software only, so we use the Lesser General Public License. NVG2053 Users Guide 311 Appendix E Open Software Announcements In other cases, permission to use a particular library in non-free programs enables a greater number of people to use a large body of free software. For example, permission to use the GNU C Library in non-free programs enables many more people to use the whole GNU operating system, as well as its variant, the GNU/
Linux operating system. Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users'
freedom, it does ensure that the user of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that program using a modified version of the Library. The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. Pay close attention to the difference between a "work based on the library" and a
"work that uses the library". The former contains code derived from the library, whereas the latter must be combined with the library in order to run. GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0. This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General Public License (also called "this License"). Each licensee is addressed as "you". A "library" means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application programs (which use some of those functions and data) to form executables. The "Library", below, refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under these terms. A "work based on the Library" means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/
or translated straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term "modification".)
"Source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For a library, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the library. 312 NVG2053 Users Guide Appendix E Open Software Announcements Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it). Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does. 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library's complete source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and distribute a copy of this License along with the Library. You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee. 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Library, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
a) The modified work must itself be a software library. b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License. d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an application program that uses the facility, other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked, then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that, in the event an application does not supply such function or table, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful.
(For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely well-defined independent of the application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any application-supplied function or table used by this function must be optional: if the application does not supply it, the square root function must still compute square roots.) These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But NVG2053 Users Guide 313 Appendix E Open Software Announcements when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it. Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library. In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library (or with a work based on the Library) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License. 3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this License to a given copy of the Library. To do this, you must alter all the notices that refer to this License, so that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License, version 2, instead of to this License. (If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared, then you can specify that version instead if you wish.) Do not make any other change in these notices. Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy. This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is not a library. 4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or derivative of it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-
readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange. If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code. 5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library, but is designed to work with the Library by being compiled or linked with it, is called a
"work that uses the Library". Such a work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library, and therefore falls outside the scope of this License. However, linking a "work that uses the Library" with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library (because it contains portions of the Library), rather than a "work that uses the library". The executable is therefore 314 NVG2053 Users Guide Appendix E Open Software Announcements covered by this License. Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables. When a "work that uses the Library" uses material from a header file that is part of the Library, the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not. Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law. If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure layouts and accessors, and small macros and small inline functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work. (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6.) Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6. Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6, whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself. 6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine or link a "work that uses the Library" with the Library to produce a work containing portions of the Library, and distribute that work under terms of your choice, provided that the terms permit modification of the work for the customer's own use and reverse engineering for debugging such modifications. You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by this License. You must supply a copy of this License. If the work during execution displays copyright notices, you must include the copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a reference directing the user to the copy of this License. Also, you must do one of these things:
a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code for the Library including whatever changes were used in the work
(which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work is an executable linked with the Library, with the complete machine-readable "work that uses the Library", as object code and/or source code, so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified executable containing the modified Library. (It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified definitions.) b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library. A suitable mechanism is one that (1) uses at run time a copy of the library already present on the user's computer system, rather than copying library functions into the executable, and (2) will operate properly with a modified version of the library, NVG2053 Users Guide 315 Appendix E Open Software Announcements if the user installs one, as long as the modified version is interface-compatible with the version that the work was made with. c) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give the same user the materials specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution. d) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, offer equivalent access to copy the above specified materials from the same place. e) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already sent this user a copy. For an executable, the required form of the "work that uses the Library" must include any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special exception, the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable. It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally accompany the operating system. Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable that you distribute. 7. You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side-by-side in a single library together with other library facilities not covered by this License, and distribute such a combined library, provided that the separate distribution of the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted, and provided that you do these two things:
a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library, uncombined with any other library facilities. This must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above. b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the Library, and explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work. 8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance. 316 NVG2053 Users Guide Appendix E Open Software Announcements 9. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Library (or any work based on the Library), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Library or works based on it. 10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the Library), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License. 11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library. If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply, and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances. It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/
donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice. This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License. 12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or NVG2053 Users Guide 317 Appendix E Open Software Announcements among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License. 13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the Lesser General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a license version number, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation. 14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally. NO WARRANTY 15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/
OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. 16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS 318 NVG2053 Users Guide Appendix E Open Software Announcements How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, we recommend making it free software that everyone can redistribute and change. You can do so by permitting redistribution under these terms (or, alternatively, under the terms of the ordinary General Public License). To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the library. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
<one line to give the library's name and a brief idea of what it does.>
Copyright (C) <year> <name of author>
This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Lesser General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License along with this library; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail. You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the library, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the library `Frob' (a library for tweaking knobs) written by James Random Hacker.
<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1990 Ty Coon, President of Vice That's all there is to it!
This Product includes libupnp software under below license. NVG2053 Users Guide 319 Appendix E Open Software Announcements Portable SDK for UPnP* Devices (libupnp) Copyright (c) 2000-2003 Intel Corporation - All Rights Reserved. Copyright (c) 2005-2006 R?i Turboult <r3mi@users.sourceforge.net>
Copyright (c) 2006 Michel Pfeiffer and others virtual_worlds@gmx.de Copyright (c) 2000-2003 Intel Corporation All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither name of Intel Corporation nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL INTEL OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. This Product includes ppp software under below license. Copyrights:
All of the code can be freely used and redistributed. The individual source files each have their own copyright and permission notice. 320 NVG2053 Users Guide Appendix E Open Software Announcements Pppd, pppstats and pppdump are under BSD-style notices. Some of the pppd plugins are GPL'd. Chat is public domain. Distribution:
The primary site for releases of this software is: ftp://ftp.samba.org/pub/ppp/
This Product includes ppp software (Pppd, pppstats and pppdump) under below license. Copyright (c) <YEAR>, <OWNER>
All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
"Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
"Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
"Neither the name of the <ORGANIZATION> nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. This Product includes tcl software under below license. NVG2053 Users Guide 321 Appendix E Open Software Announcements This software is copyrighted by the Regents of the University of California, Sun Microsystems, Inc., Scriptics Corporation, ActiveState Corporation and other parties. The following terms apply to all files associated with the software unless explicitly disclaimed in individual files. The authors hereby grant permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and license this software and its documentation for any purpose, provided that existing copyright notices are retained in all copies and that this notice is included verbatim in any distributions. No written agreement, license, or royalty fee is required for any of the authorized uses. Modifications to this software may be copyrighted by their authors and need not follow the licensing terms described here, provided that the new terms are clearly indicated on the first page of each file where they apply. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR DISTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE TO ANY PARTY FOR DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, ITS DOCUMENTATION, OR ANY DERIVATIVES THEREOF, EVEN IF THE AUTHORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. THE AUTHORS AND DISTRIBUTORS SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, AND THE AUTHORS AND DISTRIBUTORS HAVE NO OBLIGATION TO PROVIDE MAINTENANCE, SUPPORT, UPDATES, ENHANCEMENTS, OR MODIFICATIONS. GOVERNMENT USE: If you are acquiring this software on behalf of the U.S. government, the Government shall have only "Restricted Rights" in the software and related documentation as defined in the Federal Acquisition Regulations
(FARs) in Clause 52.227.19 (c) (2). If you are acquiring the software on behalf of the Department of Defense, the software shall be classified as "Commercial Computer Software" and the Government shall have only "Restricted Rights" as defined in Clause 252.227-7013 (c) (1) of DFARs. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the authors grant the U.S. Government and others acting in its behalf permission to use and distribute the software in accordance with the terms specified in this license. 322 NVG2053 Users Guide Index Index interference 277 Class of Service 191 Class of Service, see CoS client-server protocol 185 comfort noise generation 191 Configuration restore 218 copyright 291 CoS 136, 191 CoS technologies 136 CPU usage 72 CTS (Clear to Send) 278 D date and time 72 Daylight saving 213 DDNS 145 see also Dynamic DNS service providers 146 DHCP 77, 125 DHCP server see also Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP server 122, 125 DHCP table 77 DHCP client information DHCP status differentiated services 192 Differentiated Services, see DiffServ 136 DiffServ 136 marking rule 137 DiffServ (Differentiated Services) 191 code points 191 marking rule 192 Dimensions 231 disclaimer 291 DNS 127 DNS Server 82 DNS server 127 323 A ACK message 188 ACS 202 Address Assignment 82 Advanced Encryption Standard See AES. AES 285 antenna directional 290 gain 289 omni-directional 290 AP (access point) 277 Auto Configuration Server, see ACS 202 B Basic Service Set, See BSS 275 broadcast 91 BSS 275 BYE request 188 C CA 283 call hold 193, 195 call service mode 193, 195 call transfer 194, 196 call waiting 194, 195 Canonical Format Indicator See CFI Certificate Authority See CA. certifications 291 notices 293 viewing 294 CFI 91 channel 94, 277 NVG2053 Users Guide Index Domain Name System 127 Domain Name System. See DNS. DS field 137, 192 DS, dee differentiated services DSCP 136, 191 Dynamic DNS 145 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol 125 dynamic WEP key exchange 284 DynDNS 146 DynDNS see also DDNS 146 E EAP Authentication 282 echo cancellation 191 emergency numbers 182 encryption 285 ESS 276 ESSID 230 Europe type call service mode 193 Extended Service Set IDentification 97 Extended Service Set, See ESS 276 F FCC interference statement 291 firewall creating/editing rules 164 Firmware upload 215 file extension using HTTP firmware version 70 flash key 193 flashing 193 fragmentation threshold 279 G G.168 191 General wireless LAN screen 97 H hidden node 277 host name 70 HTTP 161, 162 I IBSS 275 IEEE 802.11g 279 IEEE 802.1Q 91 IGMP 91, 122 see also Internet Group Multicast Protocol version 91 IGMP version 122 Independent Basic Service Set See IBSS 275 initialization vector (IV) 285 Internet Group Multicast Protocol 122 IP Address 123, 141 IP filter basics 161 policies 162 IP Pool 126 ITU-T 191 L LAN 121 IP pool setup 125 LAN overview 121 LAN setup 121 LAN TCP/IP 125 Language 221 listening port 171 Local Area Network 121 logs settings 76 324 NVG2053 Users Guide M MAC 71, 104 MAC address 71 MAC address filtering 104 MAC filter 104 managing the device good habits 23 using the web configurator. See web configurator. using the wireless switch. using the WPS. See WPS. Media access control 104 memory usage 72 Message Integrity Check (MIC) 285 MTU (Multi-Tenant Unit) 90 Multicast 122 IGMP 122 multicast 91 multimedia 184 N Index speed dial 180 Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet 86 Pool Size 126 POP3 161, 162 Port forwarding 141 default server 141 local server 141 Power Specification 231 PPPoE 86 dial-up connection preamble mode 279 product registration 294 PSK 285 Q QoS 131, 136, 191 setup 131 versus CoS 135 Quality of Service (QoS) 107 Quality of Service, see QoS NAT 139, 140 how it works 139 overview 139 see also Network Address Translation Network Address Translation 139, 140 non-proxy calls 180 R RADIUS 281 message types 281 messages 281 shared secret key 282 O OK response 188, 190 P Pairwise Master Key (PMK) 285, 287 peer-to-peer calls 180 Per-Hop Behavior, see PHB 137 PHB 137, 192 phone book Real time Transport Protocol, see RTP registration product 294 related documentation 3 remote management 202 limitations 202 system timeout 202 TR-069 202 Remote Procedure Calls, see RPCs 202 Reset button 25 Reset the device 25 Restore configuration 218 RF (Radio Frequency) 232 RFC 1889 187 Roaming 105 NVG2053 Users Guide 325 Index RPPCs 202 RTP 187 RTS (Request To Send) 278 threshold 277, 278 RTS/CTS Threshold 94, 105, 106 S safety warnings 7 Scheduling 110 Service and port numbers 165 Service Set 97 Service Set IDentity. See SSID. Session Initiation Protocol, see SIP silence suppression 190 SIP 184 account 184 call progression 188 client 185 identities 184 INVITE request 188, 189 number 184 OK response 190 proxy server 186 redirect server 186 register server 187 servers 185 service domain 184 URI 184 user agent 185 speed dial 180 SSID 94 Static DHCP 126 Static Route 147 static VLAN Subnet Mask 123 Summary DHCP table 77 Packet statistics 77 Wireless station status 79 supplementary services 192 syntax conventions 5 system timeout 202 System General Setup 207 System Name 207 system name 70 T Tag Control Information See TCI Tag Protocol Identifier See TPID TCI TCP/IP 161 TCP/IP configuration 125 Temperature 231 Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP) 285 three-way conference 194, 196 Time setting 212 timeout system 202 ToS 191 TPID 91 TR-069 202 ACS setup 202 Type of Service, see ToS U unicast 91 Uniform Resource Identifier 184 Universal Plug and Play 151 application 152 UPnP 151 cautions 152 forum 152 NAT traversal 151 security issues 152 USA type call service mode 195 V VAD 190 VID Virtual Local Area Network See VLAN VLAN 90 326 NVG2053 Users Guide Introduction 90 number of possible VIDs priority frame static VLAN ID 91 VLAN Identifier See VID VLAN tag 91 voice activity detection 190 voice coding 190 VoIP 183 peer-to-peer calls 180 W WAN (Wide Area Network) 81 warranty 294 note 294 Web Configurator how to access 59 Overview 59 web configurator 23 WEP Encryption 100, 102 WEP encryption 99 WEP key 99 Wi-Fi Protected Access 284 Wireless association list 79 wireless channel 230 wireless client WPA supplicants 286 wireless LAN 230 wireless LAN scheduling 110 Wireless network basic guidelines 94 channel 94 example 93 overview 93 security 94 SSID 94 Wireless security 94 wireless security 230, 280 wireless switch 23 Wireless tutorial 34 Wizard setup 49 WLAN interference 277 NVG2053 Users Guide Index security parameters 288 WLAN button 23 WPA 284 key caching 286 pre-authentication 286 user authentication 286 vs WPA-PSK 285 wireless client supplicant 286 with RADIUS application example 286 WPA2 284 user authentication 286 vs WPA2-PSK 285 wireless client supplicant 286 with RADIUS application example 286 WPA2-Pre-Shared Key 284 WPA2-PSK 284, 285 application example 287 WPA-PSK 285 application example 287 WPS 23 327 Index 328 NVG2053 Users Guide
| frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | 2011-03-31 | 2422 ~ 2452 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | Original Equipment |
| app s | Applicant Information | |||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Effective |
2011-03-31
|
||||
| 1 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
ZyXEL Communications Corporation
|
||||
| 1 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0021059092
|
||||
| 1 | Physical Address |
No.2, Industry East Road IX, Science Park
|
||||
| 1 |
Hsinchu, N/A
|
|||||
| 1 |
Taiwan
|
|||||
| app s | TCB Information | |||||
| 1 | TCB Application Email Address |
h******@acbcert.com
|
||||
| 1 | TCB Scope |
A4: UNII devices & low power transmitters using spread spectrum techniques
|
||||
| app s | FCC ID | |||||
| 1 | Grantee Code |
I88
|
||||
| 1 | Equipment Product Code |
NVG2053
|
||||
| app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
| 1 | Name |
E**** B********
|
||||
| 1 | Title |
Section Manager
|
||||
| 1 | Telephone Number |
886 3******** Extension:
|
||||
| 1 | Fax Number |
886 3********
|
||||
| 1 |
E******@zyxel.com.tw
|
|||||
| app s | Technical Contact | |||||
| 1 | Firm Name |
Intertek Testing Services Taiwan Ltd.
|
||||
| 1 | Name |
R**** D******
|
||||
| 1 | Physical Address |
11, Ln. 275, Ko Nan 1st Street Shiang-Shan Distri
|
||||
| 1 |
Hsinchu, 300
|
|||||
| 1 |
Taiwan
|
|||||
| 1 | Telephone Number |
886-3******** Extension:
|
||||
| 1 | Fax Number |
886-3********
|
||||
| 1 |
R******@intertek.com
|
|||||
| app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
| n/a | ||||||
| app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
| 1 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
| 1 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
| if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
| app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
| 1 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
| 1 | Equipment Class | DTS - Digital Transmission System | ||||
| 1 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | Wireless N Gigabit VoIP Gateway | ||||
| 1 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
| 1 | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
| 1 | Purpose / Application is for | Original Equipment | ||||
| 1 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | No | ||||
| 1 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
| 1 | Grant Comments | Power Output listed is conducted. Device is an 802.11n device in a 2x2 Spatial Multiplexing MIMO configuration as described in this filing.The antennas used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons. End-users and installers must be provided with antenna installation instructions and transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. | ||||
| 1 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
| 1 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
| app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
| 1 | Firm Name |
Intertek Testing Services Taiwan Ltd.
|
||||
| 1 | Name |
A******** L******
|
||||
| 1 | Telephone Number |
886-3******** Extension:
|
||||
| 1 | Fax Number |
886-3********
|
||||
| 1 |
a******@intertek.com
|
|||||
| Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 1 | 15C | 68 | 2412 | 2462 | 0.272 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 2 | 15C | 68 | 2422 | 2452 | 0.245 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC